You are on page 1of 196

TECHNICAL MANUAL

Flexiva TM
FAX-HP Series

FM BROADCAST TRANSMITTERS
5 kW - 40 kW
888-2720-001

Revision AE
Jan 18, 2021

GatesAir.com
Manual Revision History

FAX 888-2720-001

REV. DATE ECN Pages Affected / Description


Preliminary Feb 2011 Preliminary Manual
B Apr 9, 2102 P52641 Update all sections
C May 23,2012 P52961 Added 30/40 kW Models, general updates in all sections
D Aug 23, 2012 P53607 Update all sections
E Feb 18, 2013 P54586 Update all sections
F Mar 5, 2013 P54684 Update Title Page, MRH-1 and Section 1
H May 1, 2013 P54930 Update all sections
J Oct 28, 2013 P55668 Full Revision with new GUI
K April 27, 2014 E63649 Update for GatesAir, new ECM Sheets
L October 22, 64106 Manual Updates
2014
M Nov 22,2014 64149 S14 on System Interface, added note on battery
N February 13, 64352 Updates to AC mains installation, Dipswitches S5 and S6
2015 on System Interface changed
P March 31,2015 64453 General Updates to Manual.
R March 11, 64784 General Update
2016
S March 28th, 65234 Added optional FAX10K without IPA
2016
T August 65295 Updated information for IPA removal for FAX5K and
26,2016 FAX10K
U Nov. 10, 2016 65695 General Updates
V Jan. 2, 2018 66616 Update Title Page, MRH-1, SDoCs, Section 1 and Section 2.
W Jan. 24, 2018 66663 Update Title Page, MRH-1, figure 7-1.
X Mar. 26, 2018 66787 Update Title Page, MRH-1, pg 5-18, A-9
Y May 16, 2018 66929 Update Title Page, MRH-1, 10kW XP and 7.5 kW models
Z Jan. 25, 2019 67595 Update Title Page, MRH-1, Sections 2, 3, 4, and 5.
AA July 17, 2019 68017 Update Title Page, MRH-1, add 15kW model.
AB Oct. 16, 2019 68229 Update Title Page, MRH-1, add 15kW FCC Doc.
AC Feb. 17, 2020 68497 Update Title Page, MRH-1,Table 5-8, CE DoC
AD Mar. 30, 2020 68628 Update Title Page, MRH-1,Removed ECM Data sheets,
added Airflow Cal detail in sections 2 and 5
AE Jan. 18, 2021 69221 Update Title Page, MRH-1, Fig 2-1 and Chapter 3.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Publication Information
©2020 GatesAir, Inc. Proprietary and Confidential.
GatesAir considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for
making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this
publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other
than English without the written consent of GatesAir. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of
this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This
publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to
which it refers.
GatesAir reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications,
components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
GatesAir reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications,
components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.

Trademarks

Product names and other appropriate trademarks, e.g. Maxiva™, Intraplex® HD Link™,
PowerSmart®, Flexiva™ 3DX® are trademarks of GatesAir or its subsidiaries. Microsoft®
and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective companies.

Global Contact Information


http://www.gatesair.com/company/contact-us.aspx

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Technical Assistance
Technical and troubleshooting assistance for GatesAir products is available from the field service department
during normal business hours 8:00AM to 5:00PM CST.
Telephone +1-217-222-8200, FAX +1-217-221-7086, email support@gatesair.com.
Emergency service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, by telephone only.
Online assistance, including technical manuals, software downloads, and service bulletins, is available at our
Customer Portal http://support.gatesair.com.

For Global Technical Support Information please visit:

http://www.gatesair.com/services.aspx

Address written correspondence to GatesAir


Field Service Department
3200 Wismann Lane
Quincy, IL 62305, USA.

NOTE: For all service and parts correspondence, please provide the sales order number, as well as the serial
number for the transmitter or part in question. Record those numbers here:
___________________________________/___________________________________
Please provide these numbers for any written request, or have these numbers ready in the event you choose to
call regarding any service or parts requests. All warranty claims require a serial number to be provided. For out
of warranty products, this will help us identify what hardware shipped.

Replaceable Parts Service


The service parts department is available from 8:00AM to 5:00 PM CST Monday - Friday,
and 8:00AM to 12:00PM CST on Saturday.
Telephone +1-217-221-7500 or email servicepartsreq@gatesair.com.

Unpacking
Carefully unpack the equipment and perform a visual inspection to determine if any damage was incurred
during shipment. Retain the shipping materials until it has been verified that all equipment has been received
undamaged. Locate and retain all packing check lists. Use the packing check list to help locate and identify any
components or assemblies which were removed for shipping and must be reinstalled. Also remove any shipping
supports, straps, and packing materials prior to initial turn on.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Returns And Exchanges
No equipment can be returned unless written approval and a return authorization is received from GatesAir.
Special shipping instructions and coding will be provided to assure proper handling. Complete details regarding
circumstances and reasons for return are to be included in the request for return. Custom equipment or special
order equipment is not returnable. In those instances where return or exchange of equipment is at the request
of the customer, or convenience of the customer, a restocking fee will be charged. All returns will be sent freight
prepaid and properly insured by the customer. When communicating with GatesAir, specify the GatesAir order
number or invoice number.

Safety

This manual is intended as a general guide for trained and qualified personnel who are aware of the dangers
inherent in handling potentially hazardous electrical/electronic circuits. It is not intended to be a complete
statement of all safety precautions which should be observed by personnel in using this or other electronic
equipment.

The installation, operation, maintenance and service of this equipment involves risks to personnel and
equipment, and must be performed only by qualified personnel exercising due care. GatesAir shall not be
responsible for injury or damage resulting from improper procedures or from the use of improperly trained or
inexperienced personnel performing such tasks. During installation and operation of this equipment, local
building/electrical codes and fire protection standards must be observed.

! WARNING:
THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES IN THIS EQUIPMENT ARE DANGEROUS. PER-
SONNEL MUST AT ALL TIMES OBSERVE SAFETY WARNINGS, INSTRUCTIONS
AND REGULATIONS.

! WARNING:
ALWAYS DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE OPENING COVERS, DOORS, ENCLO-
SURES, GATES, PANELS, OR SHIELDS. ALWAYS USE GROUNDING STICKS AND
SHORT OUT HIGH VOLTAGE POINTS BEFORE SERVICING. NEVER MAKE INTER-
NAL ADJUSTMENTS, PERFORM MAINTENANCE, OR SERVICE WHEN ALONE OR
WHEN FATIGUED.

! WARNING:
DO NOT REMOVE, SHORT-CIRCUIT OR TAMPER WITH INTERLOCK SWITCHES
ON ACCESS COVERS, DOORS, ENCLOSURES, GATES, PANELS OR SHIELDS.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS, KNOW YOUR EQUIPMENT AND DON’T
TAKE CHANCES.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


! WARNING:
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ENSURE THAT POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED. IF
OIL FILLED OR ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS ARE UTILIZED IN YOUR EQUIPMENT,
AND IF A LEAK OR BULGE IS APPARENT ON THE CAPACITOR CASE WHEN THE
UNIT IS OPENED FOR SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE, ALLOW THE UNIT TO COOL
DOWN BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE DEFECTIVE CAPACITOR. DO
NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE A DEFECTIVE CAPACITOR WHILE IT IS HOT DUE TO
THE POSSIBILITY OF A CASE RUPTURE AND SUBSEQUENT INJURY.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


First Aid for Electrical Shock
Faulty switches, frayed flexes and defective appliances can all be causes of electrical shock. Even a shock from a
domestic current - the type used in the home or the workplace - can cause serious injury or even result in a
fatality.

Water is a very efficient conductor of electricity and presents an additional risk. Handling otherwise safe
electrical equipment with wet hands, or when standing on a wet floor, greatly increases the risk of electrical
shock.

Treatment for Electrical Shock

Before doing anything else, remember that the first priority is personal safety. Do not touch a victim if they are
still in contact with the appliance that has caused the shock. If they are still in contact with the electrical source,
they will be 'live' and you risk electrocution to yourself.

Turn off the source of the electricity, if possible, to break contact between the victim and the electrical supply.
Switch off the supply at the mains or meter point if possible, otherwise remove the plug or wrench the cable
free.

Alternatively, you can move the source of the shock away from you and the victim. Stand on some dry,
insulating material such as a wooden box, plastic mat or telephone directory. Using a wooden pole or broom,
push the casualty's limb away from the electrical source or push the source away from them.

If it is not possible to break the contact using a wooden pole or broom, loop a length of rope around the
casualty's ankles or under their arms. Take great care not to touch them while you are doing this. Once you have
looped the rope around them, use this to pull them away from the source of the electrical current.

Once you have broken the contact between the victim and the source of the shock, conduct the primary survey
- response, airway, circulation, breathing - and treat any urgent condition found. Call immediately for
emergency services.

Post as much information as possible at the transmitter site. Posters such as Figure 0-1 on the next page should be
prominently displayed near the transmitter. Emergency contact phone numbers and directions to the transmitter
site with landmarks in the area should be posted near the transmitter and telephone.

References
It is very important to have a safety plan in place and available personnel that are trained and certified in first aid
and CPR. Please refer to the following web sites for more information:

American Red Cross - www.redcross.org

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) - www.osha.gov

For countries other than USA, contact health and safety agencies in your area for more information.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure 0-1 Electrical Shock First Aid Poster (Example)

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Glossary

AIB - Analog Input Board, An optional circuit card for the modulator section of the low power unit (LPU). It
provides the necessary interface to allow the modulator to accept analog video and audio inputs according to
the PAL, NTSC, or SECAM standards. Not available in all models.

ADC - Analog to Digital Converter

ASI - Asynchronous Serial Interface, A streaming format used to carry the MPEG transport stream from the
network origination point to the transmitter for modulation onto the RF carrier(s).

ATSC - Advanced Television Subcommittee, a digital television standard featuring a single, vestigial-sideband
carrier and an 8-VSB modulation constellation. The transport stream format may be either SMPTE310 or ASI.
The data rate before forward error correction is 19.392658 Mbit/s. The transmitted data rate with error
correction is 32.28 Mbit/s.

Back Porch - The portion of the analog video horizontal line waveform following the sync pulse but before the
start of active video. Only used in models that are capable of analog modulation.

Band III - The VHF radio frequency band from 168 MHz to 242 MHz.

Band IV - The UHF radio frequency band from 470 MHz to 860 MHz.

BPF - Band Pass Filter. May also be called a mask filter or critical mask filer. A high power filter centered about
the desired channel bandwidth and located at the transmitter output port to eliminate out-of-band
intermodulation products arising from the power amplification process.

BTSC - Broadcast Television Systems Committee

CAN - Controller Area Network (CAN or CAN-bus) is a serial communications standard designed to allow micro
controllers and devices to communicate with each other.

COFDM - Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex. A transmission technique in which the information
content of a complete ensemble (multiplex) is divided and modulated onto a multitude of closely neighboring
RF carriers within a channel bandwidth (frequency block). The division of the information payload among a
large number of RF carriers ensures that each individual RF carrier has a very low data rate (symbol rate). The
long symbol period of the individual RF carriers allows the receiver to wait until all delayed signal reflections
have arrived and been added to the direct signal (...during a guard interval to be discarded). This permits
recovery a stable signal in difficult reception conditions, especially during mobile reception.

CPLD - Complex programmable logic device.

CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Checksum is a procedure for error detection in digital signals. Before distribution to the
transmitter, a CRC is computed for the transport stream signal. This CRC is sent in the transport stream. Upon
reception at the transmitter site, another CRC is computed from the received transport stream and compared
to the transmitted value. If the CRCs are identical, no error has occurred during the distribution to the
transmitter site.

DAB Mode - Digital Audio Broadcast is a A digital radio/multimedia standard for transmitting multiple programs
within a 1.5 MHz RF frequency block. The original DAB standard has been extended by two different
enhancements to the encoding layer: DAB-Plus and DMB. All three standards use the original DAB modulation
format in the transmitter (changes are upstream in the encoder). Four different DAB modes exist. VAX model
transmitters use DAB mode I.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


DAC - Digital Analog Converter refers to a circuit that converts digital values inside the processing stages of the
LPU modulator into analog RF waveforms for amplification and transmission by the transmitter.

dBm - Decibels above a milliwatt refers to a logarithmic signal power measurement scale referenced to 1 mW. 0
dBm is equivalent to 1 mW. 10dBm = 10mW, 20dBm = 100mW, 30dBm = 1000mW.

DMB - Digital Multimedia Broadcasting is a modification of the basic DAB system according to ETSI standard (TS
102 427 and TS 102 428) using MPEG-4 (H.264) and BSAC/HE-AAC V2 compression to permit sending of
multimedia information (radio, TV, and data casting) to mobile devices such as mobile phones. Originally
developed in South Korea.

DNS - The Domain Name System (DNS) is a naming system for computers connected to the Internet or a
network. It translates user domain names to the assigned numerical IP addresses.

DUC - Digital Upconverter is a circuit in the LPU modulator section that converts the digital modulated baseband
signal to the 140 MHz digital intermediate frequency.

Dynamic Delay - Refers to a processing function provided in the modulator section to compensate for different
delays of the program data stream in the data distribution network between the network origination point and
various transmitter sites. A time-stamp contained in the transport stream serves as a reference. The present
time is delivered by a GPS receiver at the transmitter (1pps signal, rising slope). Comparing these two sources,
the dynamic delay function is able to synchronize the program input to all transmitters over a one-second
correction range.

Ensemble - The complete information payload being received and processed by the transmitter, typically when
transmitting according to the DAB standard. In general, the ensemble includes audio programs, data services,
and possibly video content.

ETI - Ensemble Transport Interface refers to the transport stream format for DAB/DMB broadcasting (2.048
Mbit/s, G.703) used to send program material from the ensemble provider to all DAB transmitters in a network.
The ETI format has two varieties: ETI-NA and ETI-NI.

ETI (NA) - Ensemble Transport Interface, Network Adapted Layer, is a protocol suited for transmitting the ETI
signal via telecom networks. It has a frame structure that complies with G.704 specifications and contains error
protection information (Reed Solomon Code). The bit clock frequency is 2.048 MBit/s.

ETI (NI) - Ensemble Transport Interface, Network Independent Layer, is a protocol is suited for transmission with
connections that have a low error rate and a constant signal delay. It does not contain any error protection
information. The bit clock frequency is 2.048 MBit/s.

EIB - ETI Input Board is an optional circuit card for the modulator section of the low power unit (LPU). It
provides the necessary interface to allow the modulator to accept ETI transport streams according to the DAB
digital transmission standard.

Ethernet - Physical interface by which a device may be connected to a LAN and/or the Internet to provide web-
based supervision. It generally employs an RJ45 connector.

EVM - Error Vector Magnitude is a measure used to quantify the performance of the quality the digital being
transmitted. A signal sent by an ideal transmitter would have all constellation points precisely at the ideal
locations. However, various imperfections in the signal path cause the actual constellation points to deviate
from the ideal locations by finite error vectors. Generally associated with the ATSC modulation standard.
Analogous to the modulation error ration (MER) used for the DVB, DAB and other modulation

FEF- Future Extension Frames

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


FFT- Fast Fourier Transform

FPGA - Field Programmable Gate Array, is an integrated circuit designed to be configured by the customer or
designer after manufacturing. FPGAs perform many of the intensive digital processing steps used to synthesize
the transmitted RF signal in the LPU modulator section.

GPSS - Global Positioning Satellite System is satellite-based navigation system commonly used for determining
position and navigating. In a single frequency network context, it delivers an extremely precise time reference
(UTC... universal time coordinated) that is used to synchronize all transmitters.

GUI - Graphical User Interface is a type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic devices via
images rather than text commands. In this application, the user interface provided by a touch screen in dual
drive systems or the web-based remote interface served over the Ethernet interface.

Hierarchical Mode - A transmission technique whereby the transmitted data payload is divided into a lower
data rate high priority (HP) stream and a higher data rate low priority (LP) stream. Those receivers with difficult
reception conditions decode only the more robust HP data stream, while receivers with good reception
conditions receive both data streams.

Hot-pluggable - Term to denote that the device in question can be removed while transmitter is operating
without suffering damage or causing damage to other devices.

HPF - High Power Filter also referred to as mask filter or critical filter.

HTML - HyperText Markup Language is the predominant markup language for web pages. HTML is the basic
building block of web pages.

IP - Internet Protocol

IP Address - Internet Protocol Address is a numerical label assigned to each device (e.g., computer, printer)
participating in a computer network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for communication. An IP address
serves two principal functions: host or network interface identification and location addressing.

ISP - In-System Programming refers to a GatesAir utility used to update transmitter software.

LCD - Liquid Crystal Display is a thin, flat electronic visual display that uses the light modulating properties of
liquid crystals to display text and images. Often used to refer to the blue display screen on the front panel of
LPU (low power unit).

LPF - Low Pass Filter. Typically installed close to the transmitter output port. It is used to attenuate out of band
emissions at the signal harmonic frequencies arising from the high power amplification process. It may also be
referred to as a harmonic filter.

LPU - Low Power Unit. Device that contains modulator (exciter) and amplifier sections. There are several
different versions of LPU.

LVDS - Low-Voltage Differential Signalling

Mask Filter - Filter designed to pass a specified frequency band.

MCM - Master Control Module is a circuit board in the TCU (transmitter control unit). TCUs are used in some
versions of GatesAir transmitters. Later model transmitters use the MSC2 as a transmitter control device.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


MER - Modulation Error Ratio is a measure used to quantify the quality of the digital being transmitted. A signal
sent by an ideal transmitter would have all constellation points precisely at the ideal locations. However various
imperfections in the signal path cause the actual constellation points to deviate from the ideal locations by
finite error vectors. The modulation error ratio quantifies the ratio of the desired signal to the undesired error
vectors. MER is typically associated with COFDM modulation formats such as DVB or DAB.

MFS - Mega Frame Sync

MIB - Management Information Base

MIP - Mega frame Initialization Packet

NICAM - Near Instantaneous Companded Audio Multiplex; early form of lossy compression for digital audio.

NIT - Network Information Table

PA - Power Amplifier is an electronic circuit that accepts a low level RF signal and outputs an amplified replica.

PAB - Power Amplifier Block refers to a high power amplifier stage. May refer to the LPU power amplifier
section or one or more high power amplification stages external to the LPU. PABs are typically numbered from
1…n with PAB 1 being the highest in the rack.

PC - Personal Computer

PCB - Printed Circuit Board in the transmitter.

PCM - Processor Control Module is a circuit card in the transmitter control unit (TCU). The MCM card provides
most of the core control functions, whereas the PCM card controls the user remote & GUI interface. Later
model transmitters use the MSC2 instead of the TCU.

PFRU - Precise Frequency Reference Unit is a circuit sub-assembly inside the LPU modulator section responsible
for supplying the various high-stability oscillator signals required to synthesize the RF waveform that will be
transmitted.

PLL - Phase Locked Loop

PRBS - Pseudo Random Binary Sequence is an endless series of random numbers typically used for transmitter
test purposes, often when a valid transport stream does not exist.

PS - Power Supply is a device that supplies DC electrical energy to one or more electric loads, typically via the
rectification of an AC mains electrical input.

RF - Radio Frequency refers to an electrical oscillation at the frequency of radio waves in the range of 3 kHz to
300 GHz. In this application, typically a signal in the 168 MHz to 242 MHz frequency range of the VAX
transmitter.

RS-485 - TIA/EIA standard for serial multipoint communications lines, also known as EIA-485 and TIA/EIA-485, is
a standard defining the electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced digital multipoint
systems. The standard is published by the Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance (TIA/EIA).

RTACTM - Real Time Adaptive Correction is a signal processing technique applied in the modulator signal
generation stage which seeks to correct distortions produced in the high power amplification and filtering
stages by means of pre-distortion.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


RU - Is an abbreviation for rack unit. One rack unit equals 1.75" (44.45mm). The rack unit is used to describe the
height of components that will be placed in racks.

SFN - Single Frequency Network is a type of transmission network in which all transmitters are synchronized in
frequency and phase (symbol). This transmission technique offers high frequency economy, as a single
frequency can be used in a large geographic area.

SMA - SMA connector - consists of a 0.250x36 thread. The male is equipped with a 0.312 inch (7.925mm) hex
nut.

SMPTE 310 - A transport stream format sometimes employed with the ATSC digital television standard. Refers
to the set of cooperating standards that label individual frames of video or film with a time code defined by the
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.

Static Delay - A delay function provided by the exciter over a manually settable range of 0 to 1000 ms to
compensate for differences in signal processing delays or local propagation conditions for individual
transmitters in a single frequency network.

Sync (Sync pulse) - Term used in analog broadcasting that refers to the horizontal synchronization pulse in the
video waveform which, when transmitted, creates the highest level of peak envelope power in the transmitter.

TCO - Total Cost of Operation

TII - Transmitter Identification Information is a data field transmitted during the null in the DAB RF frame
containing transmitter identification information for use by the receiver. Each transmitter in a single frequency
network has its own unique TII identifier.

Time Stamps - Data fields in the transmission protocol (e.g. in the ETI signal) containing timing information for
the purposes of signal monitoring and synchronization.

TS - Transport Stream refers to a standard format for transmission and storage of audio, video, and data for
broadcast systems such as DVB and ATSC. The transport stream specifies a container format encapsulating
packetized elementary streams, with error correction and stream synchronization features for maintaining
transmission integrity when the signal is degraded. Depending on the digital transmission standard, the
transport stream may be in the SMPTE310, ASI, or ETI format.

TPO - Transmitter Power Output refers to the transmitter forward output power level.

TSP - Transport Stream Packet

UDC - Up-Down Converter refers to a circuit in the LPU modulator section that converts an 140 MHz
intermediate frequency signal to the final desired VHF RF channel frequency (upconversion) or vice versa (down
conversion)

UPS - Uninterruptable Power Supply is a battery-based system designed to provide power during an AC mains
failure event.

VGA - Video Graphics Array is a video display standard used by the personal computer industry based on a 640
x 480 pixel resolution. The standard used by the TCU touchscreen in dual drive systems.

VHF - Very High Frequency is the radio frequency range of 30 MHz to 300 MHz. In this application, the 168 MHz
to 242 MHz frequency band covered by a VAX transmitter.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


WEB - A system of Internet servers that support HTML formatted documents. A device or interface that uses
HTML formatted documents transmitted according to the IP protocol, typically over LAN/WAN/Internet servers,
but also locally via 1:1 communications.

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


5300 Kings Island Dr
Mason, OH USA 45040
1 800.622.0022
gatesair.com

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


5300 Kings Island Dr
Mason, OH USA 45040
1 800.622.0022
gatesair.com

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
Table of Contents
Section-1 Introduction Section-3 Operation
Purpose of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
FAX Options and Spare Parts Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
FAX5/7.5/10 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
FAX15 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Internal Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
FAX20 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 RF Sample and RTAC Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
FAX30 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 FAX 15kW splitter LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
FAX40 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Exciter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 ON/OFF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
FAX Spare Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Power Raise/Lower Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
FAX Transmitter Description and Features . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Remote Enable/Disable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
FAX5/10 Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 LCD Navigation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
FAX15/20 Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Power Button Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
FAX30 Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Status Button Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
FAX40 Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 STATUS >LOG Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
FAX Specifications(All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 STATUS>EXCITER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Selecting Location for Transmitter Placement . . . . . 1-13 STATUS>Drive Chain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 STATUS>POWER AMP Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 STATUS>OUTPUT Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
AC Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 STATUS>POWER SUPPLIES Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Surge Suppression Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 STATUS>SYSTEM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Voltage Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 STATUS>>SW REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
STATUS>>TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
RF Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
SET-UP Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Transmitter Setup/Configuration and Calibration . . . 3-20
Section-2 Installation SETUP>TX CONTROL Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SETUP>SYSTEM SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SETUP>TX CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Returns and Exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Transmitter Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>TX POWER CAL Menu . . . . . 3-22
Installation and Outline Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>POWER SUPPLY SET. . . . . . . 3-22
Personnel and Equipment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>AIRFLOW SET . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>PWR BLOCK CAL . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>REJ LOAD CAL. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>CAL RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Remove Shipping Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SETUP>EXCITER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Setting Transmitter in Place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SETUP>NETWORK SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Rack Mounting FAX5/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
SETUP>DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Equipment Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 SETUP>SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Exciter-Transmitter Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 SETUP>RESTORE DEFAULTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Installing A Non-GatesAir Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
RF Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 GUI HOME SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
AC Power Requirements and Connection . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Event Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
AC Connection without Distribution Panel. . . . . . . 2-11 HTML Event/Fault Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
AC Connection with Distribution Panel . . . . . . . . . 2-13 System>System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Cooling Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 System>System Setup>System Service Menu . . . . . 3-34
Initial Turn On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 System>System Setup>System Config Menu . . . . . 3-35
User Remote Control Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 System>System Setup>Network Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
System>Network Settings>IP Addressing . . . . . . . . 3-35

1
Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
Table of Contents
System>Ethernet Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Changing PA, IPA, & Power Supply Modules . . . . . 5-12
Protocol Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Power Supply Module Replacement Procedure . . 5-13
System>Network Settings>SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Configuration File, Fault Logs and Software Upload 5-14
System>Network>Access Control Table . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Config File Save/Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
System>Network>ARP Chache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Save Config File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
System>Network>Email Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Upload Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
System>Network>Network Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Software Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
IP Receive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 System Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
IP Transmit Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 System Forward/Reflected Power Calibration . . . . 5-16
TCP Receive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Power Block Power Calibration FAX15/20/30/40 Only5-18
TCP Connection Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Transmitter Air Flow Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
UDP Receive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Exciter Power Calibration/Switchover Threshold . 5-19
UDP Transmit Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Power Supply Voltage Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
ICMP Receive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Reject Load Calibration (Power/Fan Speed) FAX15/20/30/
ICMP Transmit Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 40 Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Interface (INTF) Receive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Backup Control Mode Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Interface (INTF) Transmit Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 UPS Mode Power Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ARP Receiver Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 System PA Efficiency Procedure (FM+HD or HD Modes
ARP Transmit Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
System>Network>LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 IPA Bypass FAX 5/7.5/10XP/15 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
System>Network>Secure Comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Board and Assembly Replacement Procedures . . . . 5-23
System>System Setup>Network>NTP Menu . . . . . 3-51 Backplane Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
SYSTEM>System Setup>Network>ISP Menu. . . . . . 3-52 System Interface Control Board Replacement . . . . 5-24
Multi Unit System Interface Board Replacement. . 5-26
Section-4 Theory Control and Display Board Replacement . . . . . . . . 5-27
10-way/14-Way Power Splitter Assembly Replacement5-
FAX Transmitter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
27
10kW with IPA RF Block Diagram Description. . . . . . 4-1
10/14-Way Combiner Assembly Replacement . . . 5-28
FAX5, FAX 7.5 and FAX10 without IPA RF Block Diagram
15kW 2-way splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
4-4
FAX 15 /FAX20 RF Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
FAX30 RF Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Section-6 Diagnostics
FAX40 RF Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
System APC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Troubleshooting Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
PA Module Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 LED Indicator Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Power Supply System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Transmitter Front Panel Controller LED Indicators . 6-1
Fan Control Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 System Interface Control Module LED Indicators . . 6-3
Front Panel Control/Display Board Description . . . 4-13 Power Supply Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
System Interface Control Board Description . . . . . . 4-14
Telnet Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Section-5 Maintenance Section-7 Parts List


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exploded View 10 kW Power Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
AC Distribution Panel Parts (All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Dipswitch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
FAX15/20/30/40 Specific Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Transmitter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Reject Load Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Air Filter Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Splitters/Combiners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
PA Module Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Periodic Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Control and Display Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
PA/PS Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Scope and Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

2
Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
Table of Contents
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

3
Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
Table of Contents

4
Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-1
January 18, 2021

1 Section-1 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of This Manual


This manual provides important information for the proper installation, operation and maintenance of the Flexiva
FAX Series of transmitters including the 5kW, 10kW, 20kW, 30kW, and 40kW systems. The various sections of the
manual provide the following types of information.
• Section 1: Identifies the options available including spare parts kits. Provides detailed information required
prior to the installation of the transmitter, including mechanical, cooling and electrical data, Ground-
ing, AC Mains requirements and RF transmission line information.
• Section 2: Details the proper steps to install the transmitter and putting it on the air for the first time.
• Section 3: Provides detailed information on how to properly operate the transmitter.
• Section 4: Details the Theory of Operation of the transmitter.
• Section 5: Maintenance, detailed steps to clean, calibrate and change modules in the transmitter.
• Section 6: Troubleshooting, included as a service aid to be used along with sections 4 and 5 by qualified person-
nel to identify and correct an equipment malfunction.

1.2 FAX Options and Spare Parts Kits


This section summarizes the options that are available for purchase with the GatesAir FAX transmitters. The FAX can
incorporate any available GatesAir exciter in both single and dual exciter configurations. There are also a number of
spare parts kits available, some of which are model dependent. Please see 843-5614-102 in front section of the
drawing package for your model transmitter for a complete listing.

1.2.1 FAX5/7.5/10 Options


FAX5/7.5/10 is a single power block and can be purchased as a standalone transmitter and racked in a customer rack.
It may also be purchased in a GatesAir rack GatesAir can provide three different model racks for the FAX5/7.5/10
transmitter.
Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-093 Units manufactured prior to August 2012
Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-476 Units manufactured after to August 2012
GatesAir Basic Rack - 981-0136-012 - 37RU Rack with rear door
GatesAir Basic Rack - 981-0136-011 - Basic Rack, plus RF Line to top
GatesAir Deluxe Rack - 981-0136-004 - Basic rack plus AC Power Distribution Panel

10kW XP and 7.5kW models:


GatesAir Basic Rack - 981-0136-219 - 37RU Rack with rear door
GatesAir Basic Rack - 981-0136-223 - Basic Rack, plus RF Line to top
GatesAir Deluxe Rack - 981-0136-222 - Basic rack plus AC Power Distribution Panel

3-Phase Delta ..... 971-0054-035


3-Phase Wye ...... 971-0054-036
1-Phase............... 971-0054-037
220 VAC Strip...... 253-0253-000
120 VAC Strip ..... 253-0254-000

Vented Rear Door - 943-5602-481 - Replaces solid panel door

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-2 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Air Plenum Kit - 981-0031-027G - Fits front of GatesAir Rack only


Remote Control Breakout Board - 735-0076-000 - Converts connections from dB-25 to Screw terminals

1.2.2 FAX15 Options


The FAX15 requires a GatesAir rack due the mounting of the power block combiner and associated reject load. The
basic rack comes with the RF line installed to top of the rack. The AC distribution is an option in the deluxe rack.

Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5615-044

3-Phase Delta ..... 971-0054-153


3-Phase Wye ...... 971-0054-154
1-Phase............... 971-0054-155
220 VAC Strip...... 253-0253-000
120 VAC Strip...... 253-0254-000

Vented Rear Door - 939-8222-171 - Replaces solid panel door


Air Plenum Kit - 981-0090-052 - Fits front of GatesAir Rack only

1.2.3 FAX20 Options


The FAX20 requires a GatesAir rack due the mounting of the power block combiner and associated reject load. The
basic rack comes with the RF line installed to top of the rack. The AC distribution is an option in the deluxe rack.

Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-187 Units manufactured prior to August 2012
Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-321 Units manufactured after to August 2012

3-Phase Delta ..... 971-0054-038


3-Phase Wye ...... 971-0054-039
1-Phase............... 971-0054-040
220 VAC Strip...... 253-0253-000
120 VAC Strip...... 253-0254-000

Vented Rear Door - 943-5602-481 - Replaces solid panel door


Air Plenum Kit - 981-0090-052 - Fits front of GatesAir Rack only

1.2.4 FAX30 Options


The FAX30 requires a GatesAir rack due the mounting of the power block combiners and associated reject loads.
The basic rack comes with the RF line installed to top of the rack and can be purchased without the AC Distribution
Panel. No single phase AC Distribution Panel available for this model. To use single phase to the FAX30, use three
feeds with breakers in a wall mounted panel external to the transmitter rack.

Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-341 Units manufactured prior to August 2012
Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-478 Units manufactured after to August 2012

3-Phase Delta ..... 971-0054-041


3-Phase Wye ...... 971-0054-042
220 VAC Strip...... 253-0253-000
120 VAC Strip...... 253-0254-000

Vented Rear Door - 943-5602-481 - Replaces solid panel door (2 required)


Air Plenum Kit - 981-0090-052 - Fits front of GatesAir Rack only (2 required)

1.2.5 FAX40 Options


The FAX40 requires a GatesAir rack due the mounting of the power block combiners and associated reject loads.
The basic rack comes with the RF line installed to top of the rack and can be purchased without the AC Distribution
Panel. No single phase AC Distribution Panel available for this model. To use single phase to the FAX40, use four
feeds with breakers in a wall mounted panel external to the transmitter rack.
Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-342 Units manufactured prior to August 2012

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-3
January 18, 2021

Documentation Package Part Number - 943-5614-478 Units manufactured after to August 2012

3-Phase Delta ..... 971-0054-043


3-Phase Wye ...... 971-0054-044
220 VAC Strip...... 253-0253-000
120 VAC Strip...... 253-0254-000

Vented Rear Door - 943-5602-481 - Replaces solid panel door (2 required)


Air Plenum Kit - 981-0090-052 - Fits front of GatesAir Rack only (2 required)

1.2.6 Exciter Options


The following Exciters are available for FAX models. These can be in single or dual exciter configurations. There is
also an option for mounting the exciter external to the FAX rack either 25 or 50 feet away. Please see exciter manual
for the various options available for each model. For the FAX transmitter to operate in any HD mode or in Split Level
Combined mode, a GatesAir FlexStar Exciter with correct options is required.
FAX 50 - HARFAX50 (and HD)
FAX 150 - FAX 10kW XP - HARFAX150. FAX 7.5kW - HARFAX150 (and HD)
FAX 300 - FAX 15kW - HARFAX300 (and HD)
External mount 25 foot cables (Single exciters) - 952-9266-067
External mount 50 foot cables (Single exciters) - 952-9266-068
External mount 25 foot cables (Dual exciters) - 952-9266-069
External mount 50 foot cables (Dual exciters) - 952-9266-070

1.2.7 FAX Spare Parts Kits


The following spares kits are available.
FAX Spare Parts Kit (ALL MODELS):
Module Spares 10kW XP - 990-1201-201 - Contains 1 each PA and PS modules
Module Spares 7.5kW /15kW - 990-1201-231 - Contains 1 each PA and PS modules
All others: Module Spares - 990-1201-001 - Contains 1 each PA and PS modules

FAX Spare Parts Kit FAX15/20/30/40:


Board Spares 20K - 990-1201-010 - Contains 1 each of the control and interface boards
Board Spares 15K - 990-1201-232

FAX Spare Parts Kit FAX5/7.5/10:


Board Spares 10K - 990-1201-002 - Contains 1 each of the control and interface boards
Board Spares 7.5kW/10KXP - 990-1201-202 - Contains 1 each of the control and interface boards
Basic Spares 10K - 990-1201-003 - Contains fuses and a fan

FAX Spare Parts Kit FAX15K/20:


Basic Spares 15K /20K - 990-1201-004 - Contains fuses, 2 fans, and reject load resistor

FAX Spare Parts Kit FAX30/40:


Basic Spares 30/40K - 990-1201-007 - Contains fuses, 2 fans, and reject load resistor

1.3 FAX Transmitter Description and Features


The Flexiva FAX series transmitters are built based on a 10 kW building power block. The FAX 10 transmitter has one
power block, the FAX 5 uses the same power block as a FAX10 but fewer PA modules and power supplies. The FAX
7.5KW and the FAX 10kW XP each use 5 PA’s and 5 higher power supplies. For the higher power transmitters FAX15
uses two 7.5KW blocks, while the FAX20/30/40, multiple 10 kW power blocks are combined using hybrid combiners
to achieve their rated power. All transmitters utilize the same control cards and software.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-4 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

FAX Transmitter Features


• FM air-cooled transmitter
• Quad Mode operation in FM, FM+HD, HD and DRM+ (FAX 10kW XP is FM only)
• Broadband design and frequency agile across the FM Band 88-108 MHz
• Hot Pluggable Power Supplies and Power Amplifiers
• Incorporates multiple GatesAir exciter models as well as other manufacturers* - dual exciter capability
• Control via Parallel I/O, Ethernet and SNMP
• RoHS 7 CE Compliant
• Typical efficiency AC to RF of 70%
• Has backup hardware control if Micro Module would fail
• SFN, Main/Alt and N+1 Systems available

*FAX 10kW XP and 7.5kW require 150 watt exciter, FAX 15kW requires 300 watt exciter.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-5
January 18, 2021

1.4 FAX5/10 Photos

Exciter A

5/7.5/10 kW Power Block

Figure 1-1 FAX5/7.5/10 Transmitter System Front View


The FAX10 transmitter system shown is setup with dual exciters to provide redundancy for additional on-air
reliability. Exciter A in the lower position in the rack is always the main exciter in the system. The upper Exciter B is
always the backup exciter in the system. These positions hold true for all model of high power FAX Transmitters.
The FAX5 is the same chassis and hardware but contains four less power amplifiers and three less power supply
modules. See Section 4 for detailed differences between FAX 5 and FAX10.

Note
For Outline drawing and Rack mechanical information see drawing 843-5614-103 in the documentation
package. The Electrical and HVAC contractors should be provided a copy of this drawing for reference.

The FAX 10kW XP and the FAX 7.5kW each use 5 power amplifiers and 5 higher capacity power supplies.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-6 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-2 FAX5/7.5/10 in GatesAir Deluxe Rack Rear View

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-7
January 18, 2021

1.5 FAX15/20 Photos

Power Block 1

Power Block 2

Figure 1-3 FAX15 Transmitter Front View


The FAX15 transmitter is comprised of two 7.5 kW Power Blocks combined to make 15 kW. The FAX20 transmitter is
comprised of two 10 kW Power Blocks combined to make 20 kW. They come standard in a GatesAir deluxe rack with
RF line to the top of the rack and the AC Power Distribution panel installed. All FAX Models covered in this manual
have dual exciter capability.

Note
For Outline drawing and Rack mechanical information see drawing 843-5614-103 in the documentation
package. The Electrical and HVAC contractors should be provided a copy of this drawing for reference.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-8 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-4 FAX20 Transmitter Rear View

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-9
January 18, 2021

1.6 FAX30 Photos

10 kW PB1

10 kW PB2 10 kW PB3

Figure 1-5 FAX 30kW Transmitter Front View


The FAX30 transmitter is comprised of three 10 kW Power Blocks combined to make 30 kW. The FAX30 comes
standard in a GatesAir deluxe rack with RF line to the top of the rack and the AC Power Distribution panel installed.
All FAX Models covered in this manual have dual exciter capability.

Note
For Outline drawing and Rack mechanical information see drawing 843-5614-308 in the documentation
package. The Electrical and HVAC contractors should be provided a copy of this drawing for reference.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-10 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-6 FAX30 Transmitter Rear View

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-11
January 18, 2021

1.7 FAX40 Photos

10 kW PB3
10 kW PB1

10 kW PB4
10 kW PB2

Figure 1-7 FAX40 Transmitter Front View


The FAX40 transmitter is comprised of four 10 kW Power Blocks combined to make 40 kW. The FAX40 comes
standard in a GatesAir deluxe rack with RF line to the top of the rack and the AC Power Distribution panel installed.
All FAX Models covered in this manual have single exciter capability.

Note
For Outline drawing and Rack mechanical information see drawing 843-5614-309 in the documentation
package. The Electrical and HVAC contractors should be provided a copy of this drawing for reference.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-12 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-8 FAX 40kW Transmitter Rear View Doors Open

1.8 FAX Specifications(All Models)


For AC mains/power consumption, mechanical and other model specific specifications and information see the ECM
sheets at GatesAir.com. For All audio specs and frequency stability see exciter manual that came with the
transmitter.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-13
January 18, 2021

Table 1-1 Specifications for all transmitters models

Frequency Range 87.5-108 MHz

Operating Modes "Quad-Mode", FM Only, FM+HD, HD Only,Split Level


FAX 10kW XP is FM ONLY

Power Stability ±0.25 dB

Asynchronous AM 55 dB Minimum below equivalent 100% amplitude modulation by 400 Hz using 75 µSec
de-emphasis

Synchronous AM 50 dB minimum below equivalent 100% amplitude modulation using 75 µSec de-
emphasis and 400 Hz high-pass filter (FM Deviation ±75 kHz by a 1 kHz sinewave).
Measured at wideband input

RF Harmonic and Spurious Meets or exceeds all FCC, CCIR and ITU requirements
Suppression

VSWR Protected against open or short circuit at all phase angles. Foldback user adjustable from
1.3 to 1.5:1. VSWR shutdown at 3.0:1 Set in software.

Altitude Maximum 9,843 feet (3000 M) elevation above sea level

Ambient Temperature Range 32° to 113° F (0 to 45° C), derated 3.66° F (Δ2° C) per 1000 feet (300m) elevation

Humidity 95% Non-condensing

Parallel Control dB-25 female connector, Status outputs open collector max 24 VDC/200 mA. Command
inputs TTL opto-isolated. Analog outputs 0 to 5 VDC.

Web Interface Ethernet rear port user configurable; front port local use (DHCP Server)

SNMP SNMP Ver 1,2 compliant, GatesAir Base MIB and IRT MIB available

Exciter Capable of using any GatesAir or non-GatesAir exciter


FAX 7.5kW and FAX 10kW XP uses the 150 watt exciter
Fax 15kW uses the 300 watt exciter

1.9 Selecting Location for Transmitter Placement


Selecting a good location for the transmitter to be placed is very important. There are several points that should be
considered if the transmitter is in a new location or being moved to a new building. Read through each point to
ensure a proper and safe installation.
• Make sure doors into the site are large enough to accommodate the transmitter. Doorway height can some-
times be a problem. If the doors are not tall enough extra manpower may be required to get the transmitter
tipped down to clear the door.
• Ensure the floor where the transmitter is to be placed can support the weight of the transmitter. See the ECM
sheets in this section for dimensions and weight of your model.
• The location should be selected so there is enough clearance around the transmitter with the doors open to
meet local electrical and safety codes.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-14 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

• Breakers and or disconnects should be within sight of the transmitter. If possible the best location is directly
behind the transmitter on the wall.
• Proper lightning protection should be installed in the building by a professional electrical contractor. Ensure
that it is installed as close to the AC Mains entrance into the building as well as close to the station reference
ground.
• If the transmitter is installed in a high RF environment, it is a good practice to utilize cable ferrites on all con-
ductors to minimize RF interference.
• Do not install the transmitter in places where it may be exposed to mechanical shocks, excessive vibration,
dust, water, salty air, or acidic gas.
• If outside air is brought into the building it should be well filtered to keep dirt out of the building and the
transmitter. See Section 1.10 Cooling for further details.
• Ambient temperature and relative humidity should always range between the following limits at the installa-
tion location:
Ambient temperature: 0 to +45oC
Relative humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing

Note
Failure to follow these installation instructions may void the warranty.

• Plan the RF transmission line runs so that a minimum number of elbows are required, this will allow for best
performance. It is usually best to install the RF line first, since it is easier to work around it with the AC con-
duits and the air handling duct.

1.10 Cooling
Flexiva series transmitters use forced air cooling provided by multiple internal blowers to remove the heat generated
by the signal generation and amplification processes.To avoid operational problems due to excessive temperature,
the blower openings must not be blocked. The transmitter Outline Drawing 843-5614-103 provides an indication of
the relative location of the transmitter blowers and the necessary clearances to respect.
Air input is from the transmitter front with hot air exhaust at the rear of the amplifier. When factory rack integration
has been provided, the exhaust air exits through a vent at the top of the rack. An optional intake plenum is available
for GatesAir supplied racks to permit connection to an external ducted air system at the top of the rack if desired.
When the transmitter components are mounted in a customer supplied rack, care must be taken not to overheat the
other pieces of equipment already installed in the rack. The exhaust from the Flexiva amplifier chassis will typically
be 10oC to 20oC hotter than the ambient air. In many cases, this may necessitate use of a vented rear rack door or
removal of rear rack door altogether. Additionally, sufficient rear clearance must be left behind the Flexiva amplifier
chassis exhaust ports, typically 15cm (6 in.) or greater.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-15
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-9 Cooling Intake/Exhaust

Note
Consult the data sheets in this section of the manual for details of cooling requirements for each FAX
model.

In general, transmitter cooling systems fall into two categories:


An open system in which the heated transmitter exhaust passes through a dedicated duct to the outside of the
transmitter building. The transmitter may receive fresh outside air directly through a separate intake duct or may
receive ambient air from the transmitter hall, with the transmitter hall being supplied make-up air from outside via a
filtered inlet vent. With an open system, it is imperative to correctly balance the input and output air flow volumes,
paying particular attention to the pressure drops in external ducts and providing external blowers to overcome these
losses and ensure correct air flow. The Flexiva transmitter internal air system is designed to supply sufficient air at
the required static pressure to cool the transmitter only and all external duct losses must be compensated for by
external blowers (this includes the optional intake plenum). Outside air containing salt or pollution must have those
items removed by an adequate filtration system, and any pressure drops caused by filtration must also be
considered.
A closed system in which the transmitter exhausts and inputs air directly to and from the transmitter room. The
transmitter room is closed to outside air and makes use of air conditioning units to remove the resulting heat
buildup. This type of system is recommended in geographic areas with especially salty, sulfuric, or otherwise
polluted air. With a closed system, it is imperative to correctly balance the heat load. That is, to size and position
the air conditioning units properly to handle the heat generated by the transmitter, ancillary equipment, building
lighting, and even solar radiation entering through windows. In may also be desirable to oversize the air
conditioning system to include the heat dissipated by the station test load, when in operation.
Figures for both the transmitter heat load and air flow volume are provided in the transmitter Outline Drawing 843-
5614-103. Consult a professional heating and ventilation expert in your area for help in designing the building
cooling system.
When the installation is to be made at a high altitude, it will be necessary to derate the upper temperature range.
The GatesAir transmitter is rated to operate from 0° to +45°C at sea level. The upper temperature range must be
derated by 2°C per 300 meters (1000 feet) above sea level.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-16 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

1.11 Grounding Requirements


Two separate ground connections are required for the Flexiva FAX series transmitter: an AC safety ground and an RF
earth ground.
The AC safety ground prevents an electrocution hazard should a dangerous potential from inside the unit
accidentally contact an exposed metal surface. This is done by ensuring all metal surfaces have an uninterrupted
connection back to the physical earth (PE) terminal at the AC mains service entrance. A physical earth (PE)
connection is typically tied to the return current terminal either indoors at the main distribution panel or outside “at
the pole” (as dictated by local codes), thus allowing any fault current to safely return to the power source.
The AC safety ground connection is made automatically for the exciter and other GatesAir auxiliary equipment via
the green/yellow wire on the third prong of the AC input cord. When the exciter and any auxiliary equipment are
connected directly to a user-supplied outlet box or distribution panel, the green-yellow wire from the AC input
cord(s) must terminate at the PE terminal at the AC mains source.
In the case of a GatesAir-supplied AC distribution chassis, the green/yellow earth wire from the incoming AC mains
service terminates at the PE terminal of the AC distribution chassis (ground symbol inside circle). The individual
subassemblies making up the transmitter connect via the green/yellow wire of their mains cords to the same PE
terminal on the AC distribution chassis.
When present, a rack buss-bar will also connect to the PE terminal. Individual panels making up the rack cabinet
without a solid, permanent connection back to the PE terminal that might be exposed to unsafe voltages (e.g. doors
on hinges) will connect to the PE terminal via a wire jumper connection to the buss-bar.
The RF earth ground prevents damage to the equipment during lightning-induced transients and reduces RF
interference to low level circuits in general. An RF ground strap attachment point is located at the rear of the FAX
transmitter and exciter chassis. This connection is suitable for use in a single point grounding system, with the
ground strap attached to the equipment rack and the rack, in turn, to a common grounding plate. A minimum 2"
copper strap is recommended.

Note
Observe this important distinction: The AC safety ground ensures that energy originating at the AC mains
source is always safely returned to the AC mains source (i.e. prevents electrocution), whereas the RF earth
ground ensures that energy “originating in the earth,” such as lightning, safely returns to the earth. Con-
fusion may arise in some cases because the AC safety and RF earth ground circuits may share the same
conductor or connection point(s) in some situations. To prevent confusion, some sources refer to the AC
safety ground as “bonding” and the RF earth ground as “earthing.”

1.12 AC Requirements

1.12.1 Surge Suppression Devices


GatesAir strongly recommends the use of surge protection devices on the incoming AC mains lines. These devices
protect against damages due to transients arising from both natural and man-made sources. (e.g. lightning and
inductive load switching). Clear preference is to be given to “series” type surge protection devices -- featuring
protection by both a series inductance / shunt capacitor filter and shunt threshold device -- over simple shunt-only
clamping devices. The surge protector must be sized to handle the full amperage of the load it is protecting (plus a
nominal safety margin) and be connected to the building ground system by short, direct connections. In the case
where the shunt protection elements are protected by a fuse, it is necessary to periodically check the integrity of the
fuse to ensure continued transient protection. Consult the manufacturer of these products for best device to be
used in each installation.

1.12.2 Voltage Regulation


If voltage variations in excess of the transmitter specified range are anticipated, the transmitter power input must be
equipped with an AVR (automatic voltage regulators) (optional equipment) capable of correcting the mains voltage.
There are several factors that need to be taken into consideration when selecting the proper AVR. All these factors
should be discussed with the manufacturer prior to purchasing a unit.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 1-17
January 18, 2021

• Amount of line variation expected


• Line Voltage and frequency
• Single or three phase
• Current output required
• Correction type (individual or all three phases)
• Bypass switch required or not
• Input and output breakers required
• Surge arrestor devices installed
The regulator should be sized taking into account the transmitters worst case power consumption, all associated
equipment to be ran from the AVR plus 25% headroom. This will ensure the AVR stays in regulation and not trip
breakers under heavy loads and start up.

For 3-Phase applications, it is preferred that the AVR correct on the individual phases, this will provide phase to
phase regulation and better dependability of the equipment.

1.13 RF Line Requirements


The RF output connector on FAX transmitter depends on the model. The FAX5/7.5/10 has a 1-5/8" EIA unflanged
output connector. If the FAX5/7.5/10 is racked in a GatesAir rack, the RF connector at the top will be a 1-5/8" EIA
flanged connector that includes a adapter to a unflanged connection. There is an optional adapter to allow for a 3-
1/8" EIA unflanged connection for models with 1-5/8 EIA output. All transmitter models have a RF output impedance
of 50 ohms unbalanced.
There are two major factors in selecting the correct transmission line for the application, line loss and line power
handling capability. Air dielectric lines tend to be more efficient but require pressurization. Foam dielectric lines
tend to be less efficient (more loss).
When considering the power handling capability requirement of the line, consider peak voltages not just the power
of the transmitter. Also the environment to be installed in, extremely high heat will degrade the power handling
characteristics of the line.
All air dielectric transmission lines should be pressurized to the line or antenna manufacturers recommendations.

Consult manufacturer to determine best product for each system.

Figure 1-10 FAX5/7.5/10 Transmitter 1-5/8 RF Output Connector (rear of amplifier)

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
1-18 Section-1 Introduction
January 18, 2021

Figure 1-11 FAX 3-1/8" Cabinet Output Flanged Connection

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-1
January 18, 2021

2 Section-2 Installation

2.1 Introduction
This section details the procedures for installation and the steps required for the initial turn-on of the FAX series
transmitters. All steps should be followed in order to ensure the installation and turn on process are completed
properly. Please refer to the exciter manual for more detailed information about the model installed in the
transmitter.

2.2 Unpacking
When the transmitter is delivered to the site, the shipment should be inspected and inventoried before installation
is begun. Each transmitter shipment will be accompanied by a packing check-list identifying which items are packed
in the various crates or boxes. Be sure to locate and save this document when the shipment arrives.
The contents of the shipment should be as indicated on the packing list. Carefully unpack the transmitter and
perform a visual inspection to assure that no apparent damage was incurred during shipment. Retain the shipping
materials until it has been determined that the unit has not been damaged. If the contents are incomplete, or if the
unit is damaged electrically or mechanically, notify the carrier and GatesAir immediately.

2.3 Returns and Exchanges


Damaged or undamaged equipment should not be returned unless written approval and a Return Authorization is
received from GatesAir. Special shipping instructions and coding will be provided to assure proper handling.
Complete details regarding circumstances and reasons for return are to be included in the request for return.
Custom equipment or special-order equipment is not returnable. In those instances where return or exchange of
equipment is at the request of the customer, or convenience of the customer, a restocking fee will be charged. All
returns must be sent freight prepaid and properly packed and insured by the customer. When communicating with
GatesAir, specify the GatesAir order number or invoice number and serial number.

2.4 Transmitter Documentation


Prior to installation, this technical manual, the factory test data, and the accompanying drawing package should be
studied carefully to obtain a thorough understanding of the principles of operation, circuits, and nomenclature used
in the Flexiva FAX series transmitter. This will facilitate proper installation and commissioning. Store the
documentation, including the factory test data, in a secure location for future reference.

Note
The information contained in the drawing package should be considered the most accurate in the case of
a discrepancy. Document any changes and all external connections, sign and date them, and keep this info
with the doc package.

2.4.1 Installation and Outline Drawings


In Section 100 of the accompanying documentation package there are several drawings that will aid in the
installation and initial turn-on of the transmitter. Appendix A discusses the procedure to join two cabinets together.
It is always a good practice to locate and review all documentation prior to continuing.
In the case that both generic and custom drawings are provided, the generic drawings are superseded by site/
model-specific drawings.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-2 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Before continuing please be sure that the site AC mains and cooling are adequate for the installation of your
transmitter. Pre-Installation information and data for each FAX model can be found in Section 1 of this manual.

2.5 Personnel and Equipment Protection


All electrical equipment can pose a safety hazard if not operated properly or if proper safety precautions are not
taken. Every care should be taken during the site planning process to maximize personnel protection on site, both
during the installation and once the transmitter has been placed into operation. Below is a collection of
recommendations to follow to enhance personnel safety on site.
• Post first aid procedures in a visible location.
• Maintain a well-stocked first aid kit in a visible location.
• Post emergency phone numbers next to all site telephones.
• Install fire extinguishers appropriate for extinguishing electrical fires.
• Maintain a file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any hazardous chemicals on premises.
• Restrict site access to unauthorized personnel and post applicable high voltage and non-ionizing radiation
hazard warnings.
• Secure all equipment racks to prevent tip over hazards, especially at sites prone to seismic activity.
• When mounting Flexiva transmitting equipment in a pre-existing rack, be sure to mount equipment low
enough in relation to rack center of gravity to prevent a tip over hazard.
• Install mains safety disconnects (pull box or emergency off button) in sight of transmitter so as to permit
visual verification of mains status at all times while performing maintenance.
• Provide a means to lock out AC mains while performing maintenance to prevent inadvertent electrocution by
a second party.

2.5.1 Safety Circuits


The Flexiva FAX series transmitter has provisions for the following safety connections, see Section 2.13 for further
details of circuit operation:
> RF mute:
The RF MUTE signal line is available on pin 7 of J1 USER REMOTE connector at the rear of the transmitter. If the RF
MUTE line is unconnected (open) to ground, the power control circuits within the amplifier chassis force its RF
output to zero, but the 50V DC circuits and cooling fans continue to operate. An example of a possible connection
point for this line would be the position switch in a coaxial switch. The transmitter mutes its output when the switch
is in travel, then quickly returns to full power once the transition is complete. This can be enabled/disabled by
Dipswitch S2-5 on the System Interface/Multi-Unit Interface Board. Shipped from factory as disabled.
> External Interlock:
The EXTERNAL INTERLOCK signal is available on pins 24 and 25 of J1 USER REMOTE connector at the rear of the
transmitter. The interlock pin must have a continuous connection between these two pins to turn on the FAX
transmitter. The transmitter is shipped with a “dummy” D-sub 25 connector (Part number 952-9266-071) to defeat
this circuit for initial turn on. This interlock requires a manual or remote "TX ON" command for the transmitter to
restart.
> Equipment Interlock:
The EQUIPMENT INTERLOCK signal is available on pin 9 of J1 USER REMOTE connector at the rear of the transmitter.
This input is user configurable for Active Hi or Active Low operation. See dipswitch S14 settings for the System
Interface Board in Section 5 of this manual. Once this input is returned to it non-faulted state the transmitter will
automatically turn on.
> Emergency Off(Optional):
In certain circumstances, the Flexiva FAX transmitter system may be equipped with an optional emergency shut off
button. This button is typically a large red plunger/pushbutton surrounded by a contrasting yellow border. The
switch terminal connections of this button may be connected to the external interlock connection described above
or brought outside the transmitter cabinet to an AC shutdown mechanism (e.g. contactor or shunt-trip circuit
breaker) in the customer’s AC mains panel.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-3
January 18, 2021

2.6 Installation

Note
It should be noted that any remote control, status or analog meter connections be made only after the
transmitter has been initially turned on and operation verified.

This transmitter installation section provides instructions on proper cabinet placement, inter-cabinet wiring where
applicable, grounding, AC power connections, RF out connection, and static checks required before application of AC
power.
The later part of the installation process involves the initial turn-on procedure and initial equipment checks to assure
proper operation.

Note
All connections referred to in this installation procedure should be verified using the schematic diagrams
supplied with the transmitter. The schematic diagrams should be considered the most accurate docu-
ment in case of a discrepancy.

2.6.1 Remove Shipping Materials


In preparation to remove the cabinets from the shipping skids, it may be necessary to remove any tape, foam, and
supports used for shipping. Remove these materials at this time.
The base of the cabinet may be bolted to a skid in the two front corners and the two rear corners with carriage bolts,
flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. When it is desired to remove the cabinets from the skids, remove this
hardware. A socket wrench, a short extension, and a 9/16-inch deep-socket are required.

2.6.2 Setting Transmitter in Place


If your transmitter is a FAX30/40 and was shipped with the cabinets split, it will be necessary to re-assemble the
cabinets. The instructions for cabinet re-assembly are located in Appendix a of this manual. Complete the
procedure prior to continuing with this section.

Prior to removing the bolts, move the transmitter as close as possible to the final location. Once the bolts are
remove the transmitter cabinet can be taken off the skid and be set into its final position. See Section 1-11 of this
manual for site selection information.
• Carefully inspect the transmitter for loose hardware, loose or unconnected wires, and any debris in the rack
• Level the cabinets
• Secure rack to the floor and neighboring racks if required
• Install all power amplifier modules in the location per the factory test data. This can be found on page 3 under
"PA Serial Number Assignments". This step, while not necessary, helps to ensure the transmitter performs as
close as possible as in the factory test. See Figure 2-1 for slot locations in the power block.
• Install all power supply modules. These can be installed in any location.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-4 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-1 Slot Locations (FAX20 Power Block 1 Shown)

Note
Figure 2-1 is Power Block 1 in FAX15/20/30/40. The Multi-Unit Controller will not be installed in FAX5/
10. FAX 10kW XP, FAX 7.5kW and 15kW do no use an IPA, or PA6 and PA7, and has only 5 Power Sup-
plies. Denoted with * in figure 2-1.

2.6.3 Rack Mounting FAX5/10

In some instances the FAX5/10 transmitter will ship without a mounting rack. It is the customer’s responsibility to
properly support and mount the equipment in the racks. The FAX transmitter will fit in any 19" EIA compatible rack
that has adequate space available. See the ECM sheets or the accompanying documentation package for
dimensions.

Another consideration when installing in a customer supplied rack is proper ventilation, read through the following
checks and see Section 1.10 of this manual to ensure that all equipment has adequate cooling:

Check Point 1: Transmitter cooling is accomplished by the multiple blower fans on the back of the transmitter
cabinet. It is important that nothing obstructs this air flow such as a closed back rack mount door or blank rack
mount panels. The fans should be able to blow air freely into the room.

Check Point 2: If the transmitter is placed in an equipment rack with a solid back door that has to be closed, there
must be large exhaust ports in the top of the rack to allow venting of the transmitter fan air. (Another option is to
add exhaust fans to the top of the equipment rack).

Check Point 3: Often peripheral equipment such as exciters, processors, controllers, etc., may take in air through
their sides or back panels. Do not allow the flow of the transmitter exhaust air to flow into their intake vents. This

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-5
January 18, 2021

may cause over heating of the peripheral units. Added peripheral equipment may require a cover or partition to
protect it.

2.7 Equipment Ground


The FAX transmitter is equipped with a RF/Safety ground lug connection on the upper left rear panel, see Figure 2-2.
When shipped without a rack, this safety ground must be connected to either the ground bar/strap inside the rack
or directly to the site ground system. A 2" wide copper ground strap is recommended.

Figure 2-2 FAX RF/Safety Ground Connection

When FAX transmitters are in a GatesAir cabinet, there will already be a copper ground strap connected to the
copper ground buss bar/strap that runs down the left side of the cabinet (when viewing from cabinet rear). The
exciter will also be grounded to this buss bar as well. The rack mount cabinet buss bar/strap must be grounded to
the site ground system. A minimum 2" wide copper ground strap is recommended. The strap should be attached to
the site ground system at the bottom of the cabinet copper ground buss bar.

Figure 2-3 Cabinet Ground Buss Bar/Strap

Caution
WHEN INSTALLING ANY ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT IN THE TRANSMITTER
RACK, BE SURE TO CONNECT A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FROM EACH
COMPONENT TO THE BUSS BAR. NEVER RUN "DAISY CHAIN" GROUND

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-6 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

WIRES ACROSS MULTIPLE COMPONENTS AND THEN GROUND TO BUSS


BAR. THIS CAN CREATE A POSSIBLE GROUND LOOP.

2.8 Exciter-Transmitter Interconnection


Most installations will utilize a GatesAir exciter and will be prewired at the factory. Ensure all connections are secure.
When installing an exciter in the field or from another manufacturer, refer to Section 2.8.1 of this manual for details
on the correct interface cable and jumper settings. See Section 1.2.6 for part numbers of Exciter Interconnect
Cables.

The following information illustrates the interconnection wiring for the FAX transmitter (all models of FAX). Figure 2-
4 shows the Exciter Interface on the back of the transmitter. Exciter connections are always made to Power Block 1
in the FAX15/20/30/40, FAX 15K Exciter RF connections are made to Power Block 2.

Note
On the FAX 15K only the RF connections go to Power Block 2, the other connections (control, remote,
smaple etc) remain at Power Block 1.

If the transmitter was ordered with dual exciters, exciter A will be the lower exciter and B will be the upper exciter in
the rack.

Exciter A connections are made to the top connectors, J2 is Control Exciter A, J4 is RF for Exciter A and J6 is RTAC
Exciter A. Exciter B connections are made to the lower connectors, J3 is Exciter B Control, J5 is RF Exciter B and J7 is
RTAC Exciter B.

Figure 2-4 FAX Exciter Interface

Note
To run the FAX transmitter in FM+HD or HD only modes, a GatesAir FlexStar or FAX Exciter and HD
Exporter are required. Please refer to the HD Exporter and the Exciter manuals for proper interconnec-
tion and setup. The HD carriers will not be present until these connections are made and the interface
between this equipment is running properly.

When the exciter is in the FM+HD or HD only mode, RTAC samples are required for the FlexStar and FAX exciters to
correct the output signal properly. Figure 2-5 shows the location of RTAC RF Sample that connects to the input of the
Exciter. These will be connected and setup for proper levels to the exciter when tested at the factory.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-7
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-5 RTAC RF Sample Input on back of Exciter.

2.8.1 Installing A Non-GatesAir Exciter


When an exciter is not supplied at the time of purchase, the customer is responsible for fashioning a cable to
interface the exciter to the FAX transmitter. There are some requirements that the cable must comply to to ensure
safety and proper operation. The exciter interface at the rear of the transmitter goes to the System Interface Board,
see its schematic diagram for more information. Also refer to Section 5 of this manual for help in setting the
dipswitches for exciter/transmitter interface.

Warning
ENSURE THAT THE EXCITER IS SETUP FOR A MAXIMUM OF 2 WATTS PRIOR TO
CONNECTION TO THE FAX TRANSMITTER. EXCEEDING 5 WATTS COULD CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE PA MODULES. THE TRANSMITTER MAY REQUIRE SLIGHTLY
MORE THAN 5 WATTS TO GET FULL RATED POWER FROM THE TRANSMITTER,
USE THIS AS A STARTING POINT TO BE SAFE.

Note
For FAX5K, FAX10K or FAX15K without IPAs, the exciter power will operate much higher (60 Watts pos-
sible for FAX5K, over 120 Watts for FAX10K and over 180 watts for FAX15K), it is still a good practice to
start at a low power and increase the exciter power until transmitter TPO is achieved.

• J2 (J3) Pin 4 must always be grounded and Pins 5 and 6 must be unconnected at the transmitter end to signal
a permanent FM mode (S3-8 on System interface/Multi-unit Interface should be set to ON)
• J2 (J3) Pin 9 sends the Mute command to the exciter. The Mute from the transmitter can be a logic HI or LO
depending on the dipswitch setting. See Section 5 of this manual for dipswitch settings and Sheet 8 of 801-
0234-051 System Interface/Multi-Unit Interface Board schematic for detailed information on the exciter inter-
face.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-8 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

• If the exciter has an external APC input to control RF power this connection must be made and the "Exciter
Type" must be set correctly in the "Exciter Setup" menu. Common selections for External APC would be FAX,
Flexstar or Custom depending on what model exciter is being installed. The FAX transmitter will output a lin-
ear APC voltage in the range of 0 (Minimum Power) to 3.3 or 4.75 VDC (set by dipswitch S2-1 on Sys Inf Bd) to
the exciter. The exciter must have a sufficient APC response time for proper operation. If the exciter does not
have the external APC input this connection is not required and the Exciter Type must be set to the appropri-
ate model in "Exctier Setup". Common selections would be Digit, Micromax or Custom. If using CUST IPA
dipswitch S1-5 on PA Backplane board 1(top board) where the IPA plugs in must be set to ON. This passes the
APC voltage to the IPA.

Note
If using the "Custom" option then the APC could be set to either Internal or External via the front panel or
the GUI.

• The transmitter will display forward power from the exciter based on a DC voltage from the exciter that is pro-
portional to it RF output. If the exciter does not have this analog output that transmitter will still operate but
will not display exciter forward power. For dual exciters automatic switchover is done by using this voltage, if
not available the exciter will be forced to the other exciter in auto mode. See Section 5 of this manual for
exciter power calibration procedure.
• Ensure the exciter RF power output is set to approximately 2 Watts for safe initial turn on of the transmitter.

Note
Additional Settings are required to be set via the Front Panel to interface the exciter with the transmitter.
Under Setup > Exciter Setup. Be sure the exciter type is selected correctly. If adding a second exciter
under Setup > Tx Setup "Dual Exciters:" must be changed to "YES".

Refer to Section 5 of this manual and the exciter manual for proper dipswitch settings internal to the FAX
transmitter.

Table 2-1 EXCITER INTERFACE (J2,J3 D-sub 15, amplifier rear)

Designation Remarks Pin Type

GND Signal ground 1

EXCITER FORWARD Exciter forward power reading 0-4 2 Input


POWER SAMPLE VDC for 0 - 100% power out of the
exciter

RS 485 + Used for FAX exciter only 3 Bi-Directional

FM_ON_STATUS Exciter grounds pin to tell PA that 4 Input


mode is FM ONLY (continuous
closure)

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-9
January 18, 2021

Table 2-1 EXCITER INTERFACE (J2,J3 D-sub 15, amplifier rear)

Designation Remarks Pin Type

HD_ON_STATUS Exciter grounds pin to tell PA that 5 Input


Exciter Mode is HD (continuous
closure).

EXCITER FAULT Exciter grounds pin to signal it has 6 Input


internal alarm

N/C No connection 7 Spare

APC OUTPUT Analog voltage from transmitter to 8 Output


control exciter output power. 0 - 3.3
(or 0-4.75 VDC Sys Inf Bd Dipswitch
S2-1 sets range) VDC linear 0 VDC =
Min power

MUTE Mute Output logic can be Hi or Lo to 9 Output


mute exciter. See switch settings in
Section 5 of this manual to configure.

N/C No Connection 10 Spare

RS 485 - Used for FAX exciter only 11 Bi-Directional

N/C No Connection 12 Spare

Exciter A Active Used by main/alt exciter switcher to 13 Output


inform web remote which exciter is
selected.
logic high = exciter B selected logic
low = exciter A selected

N/C No Connection 14 Spare

EXCITER_READY Pin is High when Exciter is Not Ready 15 Input

2.9 RF Connections
Prior to operation of the transmitter, the RF output must be connected to a known good test load or antenna.
Connect the load/antenna using the correct size connector and transmission line for your model of transmitter. It is
a good practice to use the minimum number of elbows to get the best performance from your transmitting system.

If there is a patch panel or an RF Switch for a load/antenna, an interlock connection is required to J1 of the FAX. See
Table 2-3 for correct pins. These can be installed in the dummy connector supplied by GatesAir.

Note
Initial testing into a 50 ohm test load is recommended. The VSWR of the load should be no greater than
1.05:1. The VSWR of the antenna should be no greater than 1.1:1.

2.10 AC Power Requirements and Connection


The following instructions cover both a customer mounted stand alone 10kW transmitter and all FAX transmitter
models mounted in a cabinet with or without an AC Distribution Panel installed.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-10 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

The FAX series of transmitters can be connected to 3 types of AC sources. The voltage ranges are as follows:

• Single-phase 190V - 264V


• Three-phase 190V - 264V (No Neutral)
• Three-phase 330V - 460V (Neutral Required)
If the 3-Phase voltage is in the 190-264 VAC(Line-to-Line or Line-to-Neutral) range either WYE or Delta can be used.
In the case of Wye the Neutral will not be used. See Table 2-2, Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 below for correct st
raps.

Table 2-2 AC Mains Connection Chart (See 843-5614-482)

Voltage Service Connections Comments

190-264 VAC 1-PH L1,L2,GND Set straps for 1-Phase

190-264 VAC Delta L1,L2,L3,GND Set straps for Delta

190-264 VAC Wye L1,L2,L3,GND TX will be strapped for Delta and no Neutral
required. Neutral bar will not be installed.

330-460 VAC Wye L1,L2,L3,Neu,GND Transmitter will be strapped for WYE and
Neutral required

Note
Neutral can be used instead of Line2 where applicable. (Example: Operating Transmitter on Single phase
from a 380-415VAC WYE)

Note
This chart applies to all FAX models with or without AC Distribution Panel.

Please read all the following Warnings and Cautions prior to preceding with this section.

Warning
DISABLE AND LOCK OUT STATION PRIMARY POWER BEFORE PRIMARY POWER CABLES
ARE CONNECTED TO THE EQUIPMENT.

Caution
CHECK THE AC POWER FEEDING THE FAX. IT MUST BE WITHIN THE VOLTAGE RANGES
SPECIFIED ON THE MAINS INTERCONNECT WIRING DIAGRAM Table 2-2. ANY VOLTAGE
OUTSIDE THIS RANGE WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT. THE VOLTAGE SHOULD
BE MEASURED LINE TO LINE, AND IF A NEUTRAL IS USED, LINE TO NEUTRAL.

Warning
AN EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICE (BREAKER OR FUSE) IS REQUIRED FOR
EACH AC LINE INPUT. THIS IS PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
AC INTERCONNECT DRAWING OR BY GATESAIR IF AN IN-RACK AC DISTRIBUTION CHASSIS
IS PURCHASED (OPTIONAL). IN THE LATTER CASE, AN EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION
DEVICE TO HANDLE THE ENTIRE TRANSMITTER LOAD AT THE MAIN AC DISTRIBUTION
POINT IS STILL REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH PREVAILING LOCAL SAFETY NORMS.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-11
January 18, 2021

Warning
THE NEUTRAL WIRE SHOULD NOT GO THROUGH THE EXTERNAL BREAKER.

2.10.1 AC Connection without Distribution Panel

AC power is connected to the stand-alone FAX or to a cabinet that does not contain a GatesAir supplied AC
Distribution Panel by running the AC power wires through the AC Mains input hole provided on the upper right rear
corner of the transmitter. See Figure 2-6, the wires can go in the top as shown or the white hole plug can be
removed and the wires can be fed through there.

Figure 2-6 AC Mains in Amplifier

If a FAX15/20/30/40 is ordered without the AC Distribution panel, a breaker must be supplied for each power block
and one for each exciter. The breaker and wire size for each power block will be the same as a FAX10. Follow the AC
connection procedure for a stand-alone transmitter and repeat for each power block.

Note
When connecting to a 3-Phase Wye configuration and the voltage is in the range of 190 - 264 VAC, use
the 3-Phase Delta strapping and the Neutral is not connected to the transmitter and the safety ground
connects to E7. See drawing 843-5614-482.

Caution
WHEN CONNECTING THE TRANSMITTER TO A 3-PHASE WYE CONFIGURATION
AND THE VOLTAGE IS IN THE RANGE OF 330-460 VAC, THE NEUTRAL MUST BE
CONNECTED TO THE E4-E5-E6-N TERMINAL POST TO STABILIZE THE
VOLTAGES. FAILURE TO CONNECT THE NEUTRAL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
TRANSMITTER AND VOID THE WARRANTY. SAFETY GROUND CONNECTS TO E7.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-12 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Caution
WHEN THE SINGLE PHASE INPUTS TO THE TRANSMITTER ARE DERIVED FROM
A WYE (STAR) MAINS SERVICE, SPECIAL CARE MUST BE PAID TO THE NEUTRAL
CONNECTION, AS THE NEUTRAL CONNECTION SERVES AS THE COMMON
VOLTAGE REFERENCE TO ALL THREE PHASES. SHOULD THE NEUTRAL
CONNECTION BREAK, THE LINE-TO-LINE VOLTAGE OF EACH PHASE WILL
BECOME UNSTABLE AND INVARIABLY RESULT IN SEVERE DAMAGE TO ALL
LOADS FROM AN OVERVOLTAGE CONDITION. ACCORDINGLY, ALL NEUTRAL
CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE DOUBLE CHECKED FOR INTEGRITY, ESPECIALLY
WHEN MODULAR MAINS DISCONNECT PLUGS ARE IN USE. NEVER ALLOW THE
NEUTRAL TO BE BROKEN BEFORE THE INDIVIDUAL LINE CONNECTIONS. THIS
RECOMMENDATION HOLDS FOR ALL SINGLE-PHASE EQUIPMENT WITH A 380-
415V WYE-DERIVED FEED, NOT JUST THE GATESAIR FAX TRANSMITTER.

Note
It is not necessary to observe a certain phase rotation or even phase balance in three phase transmitters.
Additionally, the amplifier chassis can operate indefinitely (at a reduced power) with one or two of the
mains phases missing. The internal power supplies connected to each input will continue to operate pro-
vided the incoming mains power at that input falls within 190-300VAC.

• Remove the cover near the upper right corner of the transmitter as in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 AC Cover Removed (Delta Strapping Shown)

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-13
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-8 AC Mains Strapping in Power Blocks

• Figure 2-8 shows the proper strapping for the AC input depending on the type of service. The straps were
placed at the factory based on the information given at the time of order, please verify the straps are correct
for your service prior to proceeding.

Note
For 3-Phase Wye service in the 190-264 VAC range Delta strapping must be used and no Neutral is
required. If set to Wye in this voltage range the transmitter will use Line to Neutral which will be insuf-
ficient voltage to operate the transmitter.

• Route the AC wires in to the transmitter and secure to the lugs as shown in Figure 2-7. The lugs shown are
supplied by GatesAir but other lugs can be used.
• Make sure all wires, including the safety ground wire, and lugs are secure and replace the cover.
• Repeat these steps for each power block in the transmitter if necessary.
• A separate AC service will need to be supplied for the exciter and peripheral equipment as well. Refer to each
piece of equipment user manual for detailed information on its AC requirements.

2.10.2 AC Connection with Distribution Panel


When the FAX is installed in a GatesAir cabinet with the AC Distribution Panel option installed, there is only one AC
service connection required. Figure 2-9 shows the AC Distribution panel which provides a breaker to each power
block in the transmitter. There will need to be a properly sized breaker external to the transmitter that is customer
provided.
An AC outlet strip is provided for optionally powering the exciters or peripheral equipment. An additional AC mains
circuits with over-current protections (example: 15 amp circuit breakers) can be connected to the strip at TB2. Verify
the outlet type in the strip is appropriate for the chosen line voltage.
If this has not been installed please refer to Section 1 of this manual to determine the correct breaker and wire size
for your model. However, ensure all local electrical codes are followed.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-14 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-9 AC Input Terminal Block (3-Phase Delta Shown)


Review the following checklist before continuing.
• Confirm presence of safety ground wire connection as shown in Figure 2-9.
• The AC Mains wires for Line and Neutral(Neutral used on Wye only at 330-460 VAC range) are in correct loca-
tion and tight.
• Be sure all AC covers are replaced.

Note
If using a 3-Phase Wye service in the range of 190-264 VAC the transmitter will be strapped internally for
delta. The AC Distribution panel will not have a Neutral bar. If the Neutral Bar is required to meet the
electrical code in your area please contact GatesAir Service to obtain a terminal barrier strip Qty-1 part
number 614-0988-000.

2.11 Cooling Installation


Now that the AC and the RF line has been installed any cooling duct work can be installed. See Section 1 of the
manual for detailed guidelines on installing a closed-loop or open-loop cooling system.

2.12 Initial Turn On


At this point in the installation the following items should be completed. If not then please go back to the related
section and complete the task before continuing with turning on the transmitter.
• AC Mains and safety ground should be connected and all safety covers replaced
• Transmitter cabinet should be grounded to the building ground using at least 2" copper strap
• RF transmission line should be attached and connectors tightened to proper torque
• Cooling system should be installed and running
• J1 should have special connector attached to defeat the Interlock
• Exciters should be connected and all connections tight
• If transmitter is running a HD mode the Exporter should be connected to the exciter Exgine via IP connection.
Refer to the exporter and exciter manuals for setup.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-15
January 18, 2021

Note
On FAX5 units prior to January 2014 with dual exciters, Exciter A will operate in to the high power input
and Exciter B will operate in to the internal IPA and will operate at a much lower power. January 2014
and later units both exciters will run at high power (Approximately 50 to 60 Watts). See Section 4 for
detailed operation of the FAX5.

Initial Turn-On Procedure:


STEP 1 Turn the AC on at the wall breaker. Verify the voltages are correct at the
transmitter input.
STEP 2 If an AC Distribution Panel is installed in the GatesAir rack turn all the breakers
on. The LCD on the front of the transmitter should now be on and sitting at the
home screen. The exciters should be powered up.
STEP 3 Verify the model and mode at the top of the home screen is correct. Figure 2-
10 shows a FAX10 in FM only mode. The other possible modes are "FM+HD"
and "HD".

Figure 2-10 FAX Home Screen for FAX10 running FM mode

STEP 4 If the transmitter is to be ran in a HD mode go to the exciter and verify the
connection to the Exporter is running with no errors. Once this step is
complete return to the turn on procedure. Consult the Exciter and Exporter
manuals to verify operation.
STEP 5 Open the front door of each power block and verify the right most LED on each
power supply module is green and no other power supply LED’s are on
STEP 6 Connect the audio program source to the exciter. Refer to the exciter manual
for correct location and level setup.
STEP 7 Using the front panel ON button, turn the transmitter on and verify the
following actions take place:
a.Fans on power blocks turn on
b.Forward power on the LCD indicates full power that the transmitter was calibrated to at the factory.
Refer to test data front page TPO.
c.Reflected power on the LCD is less than 1.1:1 for your transmitter model.
d.Front Panel "OUTPUT" status LED turns green
e.There are no red LED’s on the front or inside any of the power blocks.
STEP 8 Allow the transmitter to operate for 30 minutes to warm up.
STEP 9 Inspect all transmission line for any localized heating.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-16 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

STEP 10 If an infrared temperature measurement device is available, check all AC


connections and breakers for excess heating
STEP 11 After 30 minutes of operation, verify that the PA meter readings are close to
the factory test data. All the meter readings can be found under the "Status"
menu button. See Section 3 of this manual for further details on menus and
operation of the transmitter.
STEP 12 Verify the Airflow reading on the LCD: Set-Up>TX Calibrate>Airflow Set. This
reading should be less than 2500mv. If not, refer to section 5 in this manual for
Transmitter Air flow Calibration procedure.
STEP 13 Verify Spectrum for HD carriers and the RTAC is correcting the output signal
and it meets the compliance mask. If RTAC is not correcting refer to the exciter
manual for help.
STEP 14 If transmitter is equipped with dual exciters, go to SETUP>>TX CONTROL on
the LCD menu and switch to the backup exciter. Verify the transmitter
operation.
STEP 15 Once satisfactory performance of the transmitter has been verified the USER
REMOTE can now be connected. See Section 2.13 for detailed information.
STEP 16 If a Network connection is to be made for use with a remote computer or
control go to Section 3 of this manual for setup information.

2.13 User Remote Control Connection

Figure 2-11 FAX Rear Panel Remote Control Connector J1

The 25 pin female connector is labeled J1 "User Remote" is located on the rear panel of the transmitter. This is on
power block 1 for FAX15/20/30/40. It can be used for remote control and monitoring on all FAX transmitter systems.
The Table 2-3 provides the pinout for control, status, and metering functions.

The special connector that was used to defeat the interlock for the initial turn on of the transmitter can be replaced
with the new cable. However, "EXTERNAL INTERLOCK" must have a continuous ground to satisfy the interlock, J1-24
to J1-25, so the transmitter will operate.

Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13 shows the circuits and maximum voltage and current for Status Outputs. The remote
control circuitry is located on the System Interface board, on Revision K boards the Status Output circuit was
changed to allow for an external voltage of up to 24 VDC. Some Command Inputs require a Continuous Ground and
some inputs are momentary Ground, see Table 2-3. Status Outputs are open collector outputs and require an
external pull up. All Status Outputs are active low unless otherwise stated in Table 2-4.

Remote must be enabled for inputs to respond unless noted in table.

There is an optional Remote Control Breakout Board - 735-0076-000 - Converts connections from dB-25 to Screw
terminals

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-17
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-12 User Remote Inputs and Outputs Rev J and earlier boards

Note
If the unit in operation has a Rev J or older circuit board and external pull-up goes to a voltage higher
than 5 VDC, remove F3 from the System Interface (FAX5/10) or Multi-Unit Interface (FAX15/20/30/40)
board.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-18 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Figure 2-13 User Remote Inputs and Outputs Rev K and Later boards

Table 2-3 REMOTE CONTROL (D-sub 25, amplifier rear) J1- Inputs

Designation Remarks Pin Type

TX ON COMMAND Momentary. 1 Input


Ground pin to turn transmitter on.

TX OFF COMMAND Momentary. 2 Input


Ground pin to turn transmitter off.
This input can be configured to operate
regardless of Remote enable/disable status. See
Section 5 for S2-2 description.

POWER RAISE COMMAND Momentary 3 Input


Ground pin to raise output power

POWER LOWER COMMAND Momentary 4 Input


Ground pin to lower output power.

DRIVE CHAIN (IPA) "A" SELECT Momentary 5 Input


Ground to activate

DRIVE CHAIN (IPA) "B" SELECT Momentary 6 Input


Ground to activate

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 2-19
January 18, 2021

Table 2-3 REMOTE CONTROL (D-sub 25, amplifier rear) J1- Inputs

RF MUTE Continuous Ground pin to unmute RF output 7 Input


When open, RF output is muted to zero power.
This is defeatable by dip switch S2-5 on System
Interface Bd. Shipped from factory as Defeated.

UPS LOW Power MODE Continuous Ground pin to put transmitter into 8 Input
UPS Power Mode (Default 1/4 power). Enabled
regardless of Remote enable/disable status. See
Section 5 to setup Power out in this mode.

EQUIPMENT INTERLOCK Configurable Active Hi/Lo by S14-3,4 on Sys Inf 9 Input


Bd; Continuous connection Hi/Low required to
activate Interlock protection (TX RF Mute).
Enabled regardless of Remote enable/disable
status. Transmitter return to operation once
Interlock in OK state

GROUND Ground; Can be used for Command Inputs and 23 GND


Status Outputs, metering

EXTERNAL INTERLOCK Continuous Ground to satisfy interlock loop 24 Input


When released, requires a manual TX ON
command to turn TX back ON. Enabled
regardless of Remote enable/disable status.

EXTERNAL INTERLOCK GROUND Ground for External Interlock 25 GND

Table 2-4 REMOTE CONTROL (D-sub 25, amplifier rear) J1- Status and
Metering Outputs

SYSTEM ON Hi - SYSTEM is OFF; Low - System is ON 10 Output

DRIVE CHAIN "B" Hi - Indicates IPA A selected; Low - IPA B 11 Output

SUMMARY FAULT All faults in the system are summed together. 12 Output
Low - System Fault; Hi - System Normal

OUTPUT SUMMARY Hi - Output OK; Lo - VSWR or RF Low (Below 13 Output


Fault Threshold)

POWER AMP SUMMARY Hi - PA OK; Lo - PA Fault 14 Output

PROG 1 FAULT Status output is programmable via GUI only. Hi - 15 Output


OK; Low - Fault

PROG 2 FAULT Status output is programmable via GUI only. Hi - 16 Output


OK; Low - Fault

PROG 3 FAULT Status output is programmable via GUI only. Hi - 17 Output


OK; Low - Fault

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
2-20 Section-2 Installation
January 18, 2021

Table 2-4 REMOTE CONTROL (D-sub 25, amplifier rear) J1- Status and
Metering Outputs

PROG 4 FAULT Status output is programmable via GUI only. Hi - 18 Output


OK; Low - Fault

FORWARD POWER 3.5VDC = 100% calibrated power, Linear scale 19 External


Metering
Output

REFLECTED POWER 3.5VDC = 1.5:1 VSWR 20 External


3 VDC=1.3:1 VSWR Metering
2 VDC=1.1:1 VSWR Output

PA VOLTAGE PA Drain Voltage 14.63 VDC/V output 21 External


Metering
Output

PA CURRENT Total PA Current 4.1 VDC = Max current (Model 22 External


Dependant) Metering
Output

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-1
January 18, 2021

3 Section-3 Operation

3.1 Introduction
This section contains normal day-to-day operational procedures and information pertaining to the function of the
Flexiva FAX 5/10/20/30/40 Transmitters. The information contained in this section assumes the transmitter has been
installed correctly and is in proper working order. See Section 2 of this manual for installation and initial turn on
steps. It is important that the operator be aware of normal transmitter operation and performance and note any
changes or fault indications. Changes in operation may indicate a need for maintenance or corrective action before a
more serious problem develops. Refer to the Factory Test Data (FTD) which includes meter readings, measured
performance data, information and data measured with external equipment, and adjustments specifically for each
transmitter’s operating frequency and power level.

3.2 Controls and Indicators


The following section identifies the location and function of all front-of-transmitter controls and indicators for
operation of the FAX Transmitters.

Remote Power
ENABLE/DISABLE RAISE/ LOWER
Navigation Buttons
“Enter” is Black Circle
¼ VGA
Display

Status Menu Setup Menu


Button/LED Power Menu Button/LED ON / OFF Summary
Button/LED Buttons/LEDs Status LEDs

Figure 3-1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Note
IP address shown in the LCD is the rear Ethernet port.

3.2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators


Table 3-1 describes the functions of the front panel control buttons as well as what each LED represents. More
detailed information can be found later in this section.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-2 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Table 3-1 Front Panel Control Buttons


Button Explanation
STATUS Displays the Status Menu including the Event Log and meter readings
POWER Displays model, forward/reflected power levels and system voltage and current readings
SETUP Displays the setup menus on the LCD, includes configuration and calibration of the
transmitter
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT Used for LCD menu navigation. The up and down buttons are used to move the arrow
cursor, which indicates the menu line that will be activated by pressing the black enter
button. The left button is primarily used as a back button to return to a previous menu
selection
ENTER This is the black button in the center of the UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons. Used to
select(highlight) or expand LCD menu items
REMOTE ENABLE Allows remote control of the FAX (IP, SNMP and Parallel I/O); Disables Local control
including front Ethernet port and LCD control/config
REMOTE DISABLE Disables remote control of the FAX (IP, SNMP and Parallel I/O); Enables Local Control
including front Ethernet port and LCD control/config
POWER RAISE Raises the RF power output
POWER LOWER Lowers the RF power output
ON Turns Transmitter RF ON
OFF Turns Transmitter RF OFF

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-3
January 18, 2021

Table 3-2 Front Panel Status Indicators

Status LEDs States Explanation


EXCITER Green = OK Represents the status of the On-air Exciter and Auto-Switching
Amber/Yellow = Auto- relay
Switched
Red = Fault
DRIVE CHAIN Green = OK Represents the status of all IPA’s in the transmitter and Auto-
Amber/Yellow = Auto- Switching relay(s)
Switched
Red = Fault
POWER AMP Green = OK Represents a summary status of the all PA Modules in the
Red = Fault transmitter
POWER SUPPLY Green = OK Represents a summary status of the Power Supplies in the
Red = Fault transmitter
OUTPUT Green = OK Represents the status of the RF Output system. When the
Amber/Yellow = Warning transmitter is switched off, the OUTPUT LED is off
Red = Fault Green: The transmitter is switched on, and the RF output level is
within +/-10% of calibrated power
Yellow: The transmitter is switched on and an Output warning
exists; either VSWR or power is below warning threshold
Red: The transmitter has an Output Fault (VSWR) or power is
below fault threshold
SYSTEM Green = OK Represents a summary status of the transmitter system control
Amber/Yellow = Warning and cooling.
Red = Fault Green: System Normal
Yellow: A Control or Cooling Warning exists
Red: A Control or Cooling Fault exists
MUTE Green = OK Green: Indicates the transmitter is OFF or the transmitter is ON
Red = RF Muted and un-muted
Red: Indicates the transmitter is switched on, but the RF output is
presently muted.

3.3 Internal Controls and Indicators


The following figures show the System Interface (in all power blocks) and the Multi-Unit Interface (in power block 1
only FAX15/20/30/40). The hardware for these boards is identical, however there are several dipswitch settings that
distinguish the boards from being a system controller or a power block controller. When a Multi-Unit controller is
present, it connects to all key circuits within the transmitter system as well as multiplexing data from the power
blocks back to the Mirco Module.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-4 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-1 System Interface Board


When the board is configured as a Power Block Controller (FAX15/20/30/40), none of the switches function.There are
6 LED status indicators on the board. With the exception of the “Remote Enable” LED, all the LED’s are active on
both cards. In a FAX15/20/30/40 the “Remote Enable” LED is not active on the System Interface because it pertains
to the overall transmitter not the specific power block.
• SYSTEM ON: Illuminates when transmitter is ON
• RF OUTPUT OK: Illuminates when RF Output is within 10% and no VSWR faults
• REMOTE ENABLE: Illuminates when front panel Remote Enable button is pressed
• DRV B ACTIVE: Illuminates when IPA “B” is activated. Off when IPA “A” activated.
• RF MUTE: Illuminates when any RF Mute action occurs
• BACKUP MODE: Illuminates RED when upper NORMAL/BACKUP switch selects BACKUP or when Micro fails

Note
If the IPA switch mode is set to AUTO, the manual DRV buttons still function.

Figure 3-2 RF Switch Board Indicators


Green LED (Left) - Indicates RF Out of IPA into the splitter is at Normal level. This LED will turn OFF when the IPA
drops below 30% of the TPO of the transmitter. When the IPA level drops below the threshold and Drive Chain
Switching is set to Auto, the relay on the RF Switch board will switch the other IPA. The Drive Chain LED on the front
panel will turn Amber and a Fault will be logged. If Drive Chain Switching is set to Manual no switching will occur and
the transmitter will run at a reduced or zero power. In a FAX5 or FAX10 minus IPA the RF switch board becomes the
exciter switcher, see Section 4 for detailed RF Chain path for the FAX5.
Amber LED (Right) - Indicates that IPA B is on the air. If this LED is off IPA A is on the air.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-5
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-3 Multi-Unit Interface Board FAX 15K/20K/30K/40K Only


The Manual DRV A SELECT/DRV B SELECT buttons select the IPA path for all power blocks simultaneously. When the
transmitter is in Normal control mode and an IPA fault occurs the switching will happen automatically.
Backup is a term used to describe one of the control modes for the FAX. If a fault should occur in the Micro Module
or the Control/Display board, the transmitter will automatically go to BACKUP control mode, and the transmitter will
continue operation. This button forces the transmitter into the BACKUP control mode and allows for setting the
power in this mode via the PWR SET pot next to the switch. This switch should only be used to set the power for
BACKUP mode and otherwise remain in NORMAL.

3.3.1 RF Sample and RTAC Ports


In the factory test data there is an entry labelled “Sample Port Coupling Factors”. These port locations are different
depending on the model of transmitter. The last page of the factory test data lists the coupling factor of each port
over frequency, this data is taken directly at the port with no cables attached. However the coupling factors noted
on page three are for the frequency the transmitter was tested at only and take into account the cable loss to each
port.
For a FAX5/10 the RF Sample on the front door, which is indicated on the test data as “Front”, includes the loss of the
splitter and cable. The Modulation Monitor on the rear panel is indicated as “Rear”, and includes the cable loss (no
splitter in line) to it as well.
For the FAX15/20/30/40 the RF Sample on the front door of each power block is a sample from the directional
coupler in each power block and is not indicated on the test data.
Refer to Figure 3-3 above, the RF Sample port on the Multi-Unit Panel inside power block one is the “Front” sample
port indicated on the test data. This port comes from the transmitter directional coupler at the output which is a
sample of the combined power. It includes the cable and splitter loss.
For the FAX15/20/30/40 “Rear Sample port, this is J5 directly on the output directional coupler.
The RTAC sample ports are located on the rear panel of Power Block 1 in all the FAX models. These samples are taken
from the output directional coupler in the system and through a 3-way splitter. The level of the signal will likely be to
high for direct connection to the exciter. Ensure that the level is padded correctly before connection to the exciter to
prevent damage to the RTAC input.

3.3.2 FAX 15kW splitter LED


The FAX 15kW has an LED indicator on the reject load to the power block splitter located in the bottom power block.
It illuminates when excessive power is being dissipated at the splitter indicating an imbalance of the power blocks.

Additionally a fault will go into the fault log; DRV SPLT RF (drive splitter RF). This happens when there is about 20
watts of exciter power but O watts from the power blocks for 15 seconds. The system will MUTE and latch the fault
in the log. To clear the fault, simply press the ON button, if the problem persists, it will log another fault.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-6 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-4 System Drive Splitter LED Indicator

Figure 3-5 Drive Splitter RF Fault

3.4 Front Panel Operation


The following information is to tutor the first time user on how to navigate through the screens to observe operation
data, perform setup and calibration procedures via the front panel LCD.

Figure 3-6 Front Panel LCD Display Controller after Pressing ON

3.4.1 ON/OFF Operation


To turn the transmitter ON from the front panel press the Green ON button. The following should occur:
• Green ON button LED should illuminate

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-7
January 18, 2021

• Power supply internal fans turn on


• Fans on rear door of each power block should turn on
• Exciter should un-mute
• RF should ramp up from 0 watts to TPO
To turn the transmitter OFF from the front panel press the Red OFF button. The following should occur:
• Red OFF button LED should illuminate
• Power supply fans turn off
• Fans on rear door of each power block should turn off
• Exciter should mute
• RF should ramp down from TPO to 0 watts

3.4.2 Power Raise/Lower Procedure


To raise or lower power, press and hold the RAISE or LOWER button until the desired power level is reached.

Note
Small time delay: When pressing the RAISE or LOWER buttons, a small delay occurs before the transmit-
ter power actually changes. The same is true when releasing the RAISE or LOWER button. The output
power will continue to change momentarily upon release. This is normal. The control circuits are scan-
ning all of the critical functions and parameters of the transmitter to protect it from an overload. This cre-
ates the slight delay. When setting the power out to a very specific level, release the buttons before the
desired power level is reached. Then give short momentary presses to nudge the power to the exact level
desired.

3.4.3 Remote Enable/Disable Buttons

Pressing the Remote Enable button allows the transmitter to be controlled by a customer provided remote control
system from off-site. When using the GUI or SNMP via Rear Ethernet port, no changes can be made unless the
Remote is ENABLED.

The front panel Ethernet port and LCD menus are considered a Local port on the transmitter, therefore the Remote
must be Disabled for changes to made made. This port should never be connected to a network, it is a DHCP server.

Note
Prior to August 2013 the software required that the Remote be “Enabled” for both front and rear Ethernet
ports to be enabled for changes to be made. The Remote Enable LED can be RED or GREEN depending
on a dipswitch setting on the Control/Display board. The user can also set a dipswitch on the Control/
Display board to lock out the front panel when the Remote is enabled. See Section 5 of this manual for
details.

Caution
WHENEVER WORK IS BEING PERFORMED ON THE TRANSMITTER SYSTEM,
ALWAYS DISABLE THE REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM BY PRESSING THE DISABLE
BUTTON. THIS WILL PREVENT ANOTHER OPERATOR FROM TURNING THE
TRANSMITTER ON WHILE WORK IS BEING PERFORMED ON IT.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-8 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Caution
ALWAYS CHECK TO VERIFY THE REMOTE ENABLED LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED
BEFORE LEAVING THE TRANSMITTER SITE. A REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
CANNOT GAIN CONTROL OF THE TRANSMITTER IF THE DISABLED LIGHT IS
ILLUMINATED. THIS IS AN IMPORTANT SAFETY FEATURE. IF NO REMOTE
CONTROL SYSTEM IS UTILIZED, THEN LEAVE THE TRANSMITTER IN THE
“REMOTE DISABLE” MODE.

3.5 LCD Navigation Tutorial


The navigation button is comprised of 5 separate buttons, Left, Right, Up, Down, and the center Black ENTER button.
These buttons allow the user to navigate through the menu screens, POWER,STATUS and SETUP by scrolling up or
down, and left and right to select different pages. The left button sometimes works as a “Back” button to go back
one screen (page).
Looking at Figure 3-7 left screen, there is an arrow on the left side by TX CONTROL. The arrow indicates there are
more menus or information that can be viewed under TX CONTROL by pressing the ENTER button.
In the case of a diamond shape on the left side of the screen as in Figure 3-7 right screen, this indicates there is more
information that can be viewed by using the UP/DOWN button.

Caution
THERE IS A DIPSWITCH SETTING ON THE CONTROL/DISPLAY BOARD THAT
LOCKS THE FRONT PANEL OUT WHEN REMOTE IS ENABLED. IF THE SWITCH
IS SET TO FRONT PANEL DISABLE, NO CHANGES TO SETUP CAN BE MADE
UNTIL THE REMOTE IS DISABLED. SEE SECTION 5 DIPSWITCH SETTINGS FOR
DETAILS.

Figure 3-7 LCD Screen Navigation


In the SETUP menu there are several selections that can be made to configure, control and calibrate the transmitter.
When navigating the SETUP menu the following steps can be used as an example how to make changes. In this
example the Date will be changed. After pressing the SETUP button, scroll down to SYSTEM SETUP, press ENTER and
the display should be as shown in Figure 3-8 left screen.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-9
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-8 Date Setup

The DATE screen will display the current date (month/day/year) information. If you press the ENTER button when
the arrow is next to the selection you wish to change, the selection will be highlighted like the APPLY DATE in Figure
3-8 right screen. To change the MONTH, ensure arrow is next to MONTH highlight it by pressing ENTER, use the up
or down buttons to correct the displayed month and then press ENTER. However, to actually change the date in
memory the APPLY DATE must be pressed. Use the UP or DOWN buttons until the arrow is next to DATE, press the
ENTER button to highlight DATE, the ENTER button must be pressed again with the selection highlighted, once the
highlight clears the date is saved.

In some cases such as DUAL EXCITERS setup, it will be required to change from NO to YES. The screen shows “DUAL
EXCITERS: YES” as in Figure 3-9, in this case when the screen is highlighted the UP/DOWN buttons (either will work)
can change the entry from YES to NO and then press the ENTER button to save the change.
The menu tree for the POWER, STATUS and SETUP menus follow this section. Only the SETUP allows the user to
make changes, POWER and STATUS are view only menus. Following the example above will allow the user to get
comfortable with navigation of the menus.

Figure 3-9 YES/NO Change Example

3.6 Power Button Menu


The Power Button light illuminates automatically whenever the transmitter AC is turned on, this is the default home
screen. It provides the operator very basic information about how the transmitter is operating. To view this screen
whenever another screen is being displayed, simply press the POWER button. The POWER menu is information only,
no configuration settings are available in this menu.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-10 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-10 POWER Menu


Figure 3-11 Shows all of the information available when the POWER button is pressed. These readings are all system
readings. The PA AMPS is the total DC current being drawn form all of the power supplies in the system.

WKtZ

&t͗ϭϬ͘Ϭ<t
Z&>͗Ϭt
WsK>d^͗ϰϯ͘ϴs
WDW^͗ϰϬϴ
dy&h>d^͗K<
yKE/Z͗
WtZDK͗EKZD
&ZY͗ϵϴ͘ϭϬD,nj

Figure 3-11 POWER Button Menu Tree

3.7 Status Button Menus


Pressing the Status button will bring up the screen shown in Figure 3-12. This allows the user access to specific
status information including the transmitter Event LOG and meter readings among other status information. The
STATUS menu like the POWER menu is information only.

Figure 3-12 STATUS menu

Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 are the menu tree for the STATUS button. Details of each sub-menu are describe in this
section. Any readings given in this manual should not be assumed correct for your transmitter. The Factory Test Data
should be consulted for correct readings for the transmitter being operated.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-11
January 18, 2021

^ƚĂƚƵƐ

>ŽŐͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ sd͕^͕KhZd/D

džĐŝƚĞƌͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺyKE/Z͗
y^tDK͗hdK
yhdK^t͗Zz
DKh>d/KE͗&D
y/dZ͗K<
y/dZ͗K<
yWtZ͗Ϯϭϭϵŵt
yWtZ͗Ϭŵt ƵĚŝŽWƌĞƐĞŶƚ
Ws͗Ϯ͘ϴϰ ƵĚŝŽ^ƚĂƚƵƐ DŽĚƵůĂƚŽƌ^ƵďŵĞŶƵƐĂƌĞĨŽƌ&ydžĐŝƚĞƌKE>z
DŽĚƵůĂƚŽƌххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ džĐŝƚĞƌ^ƚĂƚƵƐ ^ĞĞ&ydžĐŝƚĞƌDĂŶƵĂů

ƌŝǀĞŚĂŝŶͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ/WKE͗
/W^tDK͗hdK
/WhdK͗Zz
WtZ><ϭ/Wххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ /W͗K<
/W͗K< ;dŚĞƌĞĐĂŶďĞƵƉƚŽϰWŽǁĞƌůŽĐŬƐͿ
WtZ><Ϯ/Wххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ/W͗K< /WWKtZ͗ϭϯ͘ϰt
/W͗K< /Ws͗ϰϯ͘ϰ
/WWKtZ͗ϭϯ͘ϰt /WDW^͗ϯ͘ϱ
/Ws͗ϰϯ͘ϰ /WDW^͗Ϭ͘Ϭ
/WDW^͗ϯ͘ϱ /WdDW͗ϯϯ͘ϰ
/WDW^͗Ϭ͘Ϭ
/WdDW͗ϯϯ͘ϰ

WŽǁĞƌŵƉͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺW>K<ϭххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺW^hDDZz͗K<
Ws's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs ;dŚĞƌĞĐĂŶďĞƵƉƚŽϰWŽǁĞƌůŽĐŬƐͿ
W>K<Ϯххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ W^hDDZz͗K< WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϯ
Ws's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs Wϭ͗K<
WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϯ Wϭ͗K<
Wϭ͗K< Wϭs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
;WDĞƚĞƌƐƌĞƉĞĂƚĞĚĨŽƌĂůůϳWŵŽĚƵůĞƐͿ Wϭ͗K< WϭDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϴ
Wϭs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs WϭDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϭ
WϭDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϴ WϭdDW͗ϰϱ͘ϯ
WϭDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϭ WϮ͗K<
WϭdDW͗ϰϱ͘ϯ WϮ͗K<
WϮ͗K< WϮs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
WϮ͗K< WϮDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϴ
WϮs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs WϮDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϭ
WϮDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϴ WϮdDW͗ϰϱ͘ϯ
WϮDW^͗ϭϯ͘ϭ
WϮdDW͗ϰϱ͘ϯ

KƵƚƉƵƚͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ KhdWhd͗K<
&KZtZϵϵϬϭt
Z&>d͗Ϭt
s^tZ͗K<
s^tZ&><͗K<
WtZ>/D/d͗K<
Z:>s>͗Ϭй
Z:>K͗K<
W>K<ϭххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ&KZtZ͗ϱ͘ϯϱ<t
Z&>d͗Ϭt
W>K<Ϯххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ &KZtZ͗ϱ͘ϯϵ<t s^tZ͗K<
Z&>d͗Ϭt s^tZ&><͗K<
s^tZ͗K< WtZ>/D/d͗K<
s^tZ&><͗K<
WtZ>/D/d͗K<

Figure 3-13 Status Menu Tree Page 1

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-12 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

^ƚĂƚƵƐŽŶƚŝŶƵĞĚ

WŽǁĞƌ^ƵƉƉůŝĞƐͺͺͺͺͺͺW>K<ϭххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ W^^hDDZz͗K<
D/E^͗K<
W>K<Ϯххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ W^^hDDZz͗K< Ws's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
D/E^͗K< WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϱ
Ws's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^DdZ^ххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺWs's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯ
WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϱ W^ϭ͗K< WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϱ
W^DdZ^ххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ Ws's͗ϰϰ͘Ϯ W^Ϯ͗K< W^ϭs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϭ͗K< WdKd>/͗ϭϵϮ͘ϱ W^ϯ͗K< W^Ϯs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^Ϯ͗K< W^ϭs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^ϰ͗K< W^ϯs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϯ͗K< W^Ϯs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^ϱ͗K< W^ϰs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϰ͗K< W^ϯs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^ϲ͗K< W^ϱs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϱ͗K< W^ϰs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^ϳ͗K< W^ϲs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϲ͗K< W^ϱs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs W^ϳs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs
W^ϳ͗K< W^ϲs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs KEdZK>͗
W^ϳs͗ϰϰ͘Ϯs нϱs͗ϰ͘ϲϮs
KEdZK>͗ нϯ͘ϯs͗ϯ͘ϯϬs
нϱs͗ϰ͘ϲϮs
нϯ͘ϯs͗ϯ͘ϯϬs

^LJƐƚĞŵͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ ^z^^hD͗K<
W^ddh^͗KE
WDK͗Z/s
dZ>DK͗EKZD
WtZDK͗EKZD
/EdZ>K<͗K<
Z&Dhd͗EK
ZDKdDhd͗EK
Yh/W/Ed><͗K<
^z^dDDdZ^ххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺWZ&͗ϯ͘ϱϬs
WKhd͗ϯ͘ϱϯs
W>K<ϭххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ&E^͗K< WtZ>/D/d͗Ϭ͘ϬϬs
/Z&>Kt^dd͗K< &ZKEddDW͗ϰϭ͘Ϭ
W>K<Ϯххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ &E^͗K< ZZdDW͗ϯϰ͘ϵ
/Z&>Kt^dd͗K< /Z&>Kt͗ϴϯй
ZZdDW͗ϯϲ͘ϭ
/Z&>Kt͗ϵϬй

^tZĞǀŝƐŝŽŶƐͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ ƉƉůŝĐĂƚŝŽŶ͗
ϬϬϭϴ͕DĂLJϴ͕ϮϬϭϮ
'h/͗
Ϯ͘Ϯ͘ϱDĂLJϬϳ͕ϮϬϭϮ
ŽŽƚůŽĂĚĞƌ͗
ϬϬϯϱ͕DĂƌϮϵ͕ϮϬϭϮ

Figure 3-14 Status Menu Tree Page 2


*FAX 10kW XP and FAX 7.5kW have 5 Power Supplies.

3.7.1 STATUS >LOG Menu


The Log displays information about events and faults that have occurred in the transmitter. The faults can be both
active and cleared faults. On the LCD the active faults will be highlighted, pressing the ON button on the front panel
will clear any faults that are no longer active but may show up highlighted in the log. If the fault returns after
pressing the ON button they are still active faults. Once the log is full, the oldest entries will drop out as new ones
are entered.
There are four possible entries in the LOG:
F = Fault; W = Warning; I=Information; A = Action or Event
The following is a typical fault:
F C1 PA6 OUT 9/28 13:10
C1 = Cabinet 1 (FAX15/20/30/40 only) FAX30/40 has 2 cabinets and 3/4 power blocks

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-13
January 18, 2021

PA6 OUT = Description of fault


9/28 13:10 = Time and date fault occurred or cleared
If this fault was highlighted it would be an active fault

3.7.2 STATUS>EXCITER Menu


The Exciter submenu displays the status, switching mode and meter readings for the Exciter(s) installed in the FAX
transmitter.

Table 3-3 STATUS>EXCITER Menu Description

Menu Description

EXC ON AIR:A Displays On-Air Exciter A or B

EXC SW MODE:AUTO Displays dual exciter switching mode: Auto on Manual

EXC ATUTO SW:READY Displays the exciter Switchover relay status:Ready or Tripped; If Tripped manual reset
required by pressing ON button

MODULATION:FM Displays Exciter Mode:FM, HD,FM+HD,SLC; Also displayed on LCD HOME screen; Mode
set by exciter which changes the transmitter operating mode between Class C and Class
AB

EXCITER A:OK Displays status of Exciter A Fault Line: OK,Fault

EXCITER B:OK Displays status of Exciter B Fault Line: OK,Fault

EXC A PWR:2119mW Displays Exciter A power level in milliwatts; Calibrated to DC voltage from exciter
interface.

EXC B PWR:2119mW Displays Exciter B power level in milliwatts;Calibrated to DC voltage from exciter
interface.

APC V:2.84 Displays APC voltage from FAX to Exciters (Typically about 0.1 Volts less at exciter)Range
0 - 4.75 VDC(Configurable on System Interface S2-1)

3.7.3 STATUS>Drive Chain Menu


The Drive Chain submenu displays the status, switching mode and meter readings for the IPA’s in each power block.
The IPA is always in top left slot in each power block, refer to Figure 2-1. The IPA has 2 amplifiers, side A and side B.
Only one side of the IPA operates, the other is in standby and ready for operation if the on-air side faults. Note that
on IPA switchover the IPA’s in each Power Block will switch at the same time. For example if IPA A fails in Power
Block 3, all IPA’s in the transmitter will switch to IPA B.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-14 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

STATUS>Drive Chain Menu Description

Menu Description

IPA ON: A Displays the IPA that is on-air; All IPA’s in transmitter will be A or B (no individual power
block switching)

IPA SW MODE: AUTO Displays drive chain (IPA) switching mode: Auto on Manual

IPA AUTO: READY Displays the Drive Chain (IPA) relay status:Ready or Tripped; If Tripped manual reset
required by pressing ON button; Trip is on IPA RF Level only which is detected on RF Switch
bd. Trip level is 500 mV out of detector which is approximately 30 % of TPO.

PWR BLK 1 IPA>> Displays Fault status and meter readings for IPA in power block 1

PWR BLK 2 IPA>> Displays Fault status and meter readings for IPA in power block 2 (If used)

PWR BLK 3 IPA>> Displays Fault status and meter readings for IPA in power block 3 (If used)

PWR BLK 4 IPA>> Displays Fault status and meter readings for IPA in power block 4 (If used)

3.7.4 STATUS>POWER AMP Menu


The Power Amp submenu displays the status and meter readings for the power amplifier modules in each power
block. Included in the meter readings is the Summary Fault, PA voltage and total PA DC Current for the power block.
The readings for each module (except for the three power block readings) are repeated for all seven power amplifier
modules in the power block. There can be up to four power blocks in the transmitter.

Table 3-4 STATUS>POWER AMP Menu Description

Menu Field Description

PA BLOCK 1 PA SUMMARY:OK Displays PA Summary Fault: OK or Fault; Faults are OVR TEMP, OVR CUR,
OVR DRV,VSWR,MOD PRESENT,UDR VOLTS for all modules.

PB AVG V:44.2V Displays Average DC volts for the entire power block

PB TOTAL I:192.3A Displays Total DC current drawn from the power supplies by the entire
power block

PA1A:OK Displays PAx A side Status: OK or FAULT

PA1B:OK Displays PAx B side Status: OK or FAULT

PA 1 VDC:44.2V Displays PAx PAV reading

PA 1A AMPS:13.8A Displays PAx A side current reading

PA 1B AMPS:13.1A Displays PAx B side current reading

PA 1 TEMP:45.3C Displays PAx heatsink temperature reading

Note
PA readings will be repeated for all Power Amplifiers and Power Blocks (up to 4) in the transmitter.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-15
January 18, 2021

3.7.5 STATUS>OUTPUT Menu


The OUTPUT submenu displays information on the RF power for the system and each power block. The power block
readings will be repeated for each power block in the transmitter, up to four. Reject load readings are for the Power
Block and/or cabinet combiner and will only be available on the FAX15/20/30/40 models.

Table 3-5 STATUS>OUTPUT Menu Description

Menu Field Description

OUTPUT:OK OK, Warning or Fault

FORWARD:9901W Displays Transmitter Forward Power

REFLECTED:0W Displays Transmitter Reflected Power

VSWR:OK OK or FAULT; Trips at 1.5:1

VSWR FLDBK:OK OK or FAULT Foldback point is user settable via GUI between 1.3:1
and 1.5:1

PWR LIMIT:OK OK or FAULT; Power limit is 110% of calibrated power; set in


hardware

REJ LEVEL:0% Displays Reject load power in percent; 100% would be with one
power block off or 1 cabinet shut off

REJ LOAD:OK OK or FAULT; Faults are RF, Fan or Temp

PA BLOCK 1 FORWARD:9901W Displays Power Block Forward Power

REFLECTED:0W Displays Power Block Reflected Power

VSWR:OK OK or FAULT; Power block Trips at slightly higher than 1.5:1 for
power block

VSWR FLDBK:OK OK or FAULT; Set in code to slightly higher than 1.5:1 for power
block

PWR LIMIT:OK OK or FAULT; Power limit is 110% of power block calibrated


power

Note
PA Block readings will be repeated for each Power Block in the transmitter.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-16 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

3.7.6 STATUS>POWER SUPPLIES Menu


The POWER SUPPLIES submenu displays information on the power supplies in each power block. The menu displays
both status and meter reading for each individual supply. The Power Supply fault has three fault outputs to the
transmitter, these however are tied together on the Power Supply Interface Board and reported as a generic fault.
To obtain the actual fault in the power supply, refer to the troubleshooting section of this manual.

Table 3-6 STATUS>POWER SUPPLIES Menu Description

Menu Field Description

PA BLOCK 1 PS SUMMARY:OK OK or Fault; Any supply is faulted this will be Fault

AC MAINS:OK AC Mains Undervoltage Monitor: OK or Fault; below


approximately 190 VAC is Fault

PB AVG V:44.2V Average power supply DC voltage in PB x

PB AVG I:192.5A Total DC current drawn from all 7 power supplies combined in PB
x

PS METERS PS Meters for Voltage and Current

PS1:OK OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS2:OK OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS3:OK OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS4:OK OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS5:OK OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS6:OK* OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

PS7:OK* OK or Fault; generic power supply fault Rectifier, Power or Temp

Note
Power Supply readings will be repeated for each Power Block in the transmitter. *FAX 15kW, 10kW XP
and 7.5kW have 5 power supplies

3.7.7 STATUS>SYSTEM Menu


The SYSTEM submenu displays status information on the Control and Cooling sections of the transmitter If any of
the submenus are not shown as NORM or OK then the System LED will be Yellow or Red.
The following are events that can issue a System Fault or Warning:

• Power Mode - Normal, Low or UPS


• APC - On or Off
• Power Limit - 110% of calibrated power
• VSWR Foldback - 1.3: to 1.5:1 User configured
• Mute - asserted by controller or remote Mute

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-17
January 18, 2021

• Interlock - External or Equipment


• Control Mode - Normal, Backup or Lifesupport
• Fans - Fan fault on door or Reject load
• Airflow - Measured on PS Interface board

Table 3-7 STATUS>SYSTEM Menu Description

Menu Field Description

SYS SUM:OK System summary OK, Warning or Fault

APC STATUS:ON APC Status ON or OFF

APC MODE:DRIVE APC Mode DRIVE(APC to Exciters) or IPA(APC to the IPA)

CTRL MODE:NORM Control Mode NORM or Backup (Only way this can be backup
is Control switch S1 on System Interface bd is set to BACKUP)

PWR MODE:NORM PWR Mode Norm, LOW or UPS

INTERLOCK:OK Interlock status OK or FLT(J1-24 User Interface)

RF MUTE:NO RF Mute NO or MUTED

REMOTE MUTE:NO Remote Mute NO or MUTED

EQUIP INTLK:OK Equipment Interlock OK or FLT(J1-9 User Interface)

SYSTEM METERS APC REF:3.50V APC Reference set by micro during system calibration

APC OUT:3.53V APC output voltage, changes with Raise/Lower Power

PWR LIMIT:0.00V Power Limit 0 V until the 110% power limit is reached or
VSWR Foldback occurs(1.3:1 to 1.5:1)

FRONT TEMP:41.0C Front Temperature measured on Control&Display


Board(Indication Only)

PA BLOCK x FANS:OK Status of fans on rear door of power block OK or FAULT

AIRFLOW STAT:OK Status of airflow sensor OK or FAULT

REAR TEMP:36.1C Rear Temperature measured on Power Supply Interface (Hot


Air through PA Modules and power supplies) controls fan
speed

AIRFLOW:90% Percent of airflow measured on Power Supply Interface


Board; Typically 90% under normal operating conditions.
Ramps up to 100% under fault conditions and higher exhaust
temperatures

3.7.8 STATUS>>SW REVISIONS


Software revisions currently installed in the transmitter, includes Bootloader, GUI and Application software.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-18 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

3.7.9 STATUS>>TEST
Test mode is for future software development.

3.8 SET-UP Button


Pressing the SET-UP button brings up a listing all of the features the operator can control and customize in the
transmitter. This sub menu also allows for all calibrations for the entire transmitter. Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 is
the SETUP Menu Tree.

Note
When making changes to the transmitter via the LCD Remote must be Disabled.

Figure 3-15 SETUP Menu

When used with a FAX exciter the some exciter configure menus are available on the transmitter lcd. If these menus
are blank or do not match the setup menu fields on the exciter lcd then a communications problem exists. This
communication between controllers is via RS485. Ensure the transmitter interface cable is seated properly and the
RS485 baud rates match in both exciter and transmitter SETUP>>NETWORK SETUP menus.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-19
January 18, 2021

^dhW

dyKEdZK>ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺWtZDK^d͗EKZD
yKE/Z͗
/WKE/Z͗
y^tDK͗hdK
/W^tDK͗hdK
W͗KE

^z^dD^dhWͺͺͺͺͺͺ /͗,ZZ/^dZ/E/E'
d͗ϬϲͬϬϱͬϮϬϭϮ
d/D͗ϵ͗ϯϵ͗ϮϳD

dyKE&/'hZd/KEͺͺdyDK>͗&yϮϬ
&ZY͗ϵϴ͘ϭϬD,nj
dWK͗ϮϬϬϬϬtĂƚƚƐ
h>y/dZ^͗z^
/EdZE>/W͗z^
/EWhd͗ϯ

dy>/ZdͺͺͺͺͺͺͺdyWKtZ>ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺDKh>d/KE͗&D
dydWK͗ϭϬϬϬϬt
>/dZd͗EK
^ddh^͗KE

WKtZ^hWW>z^dͺͺͺͺͺͺͺDKh>d/KE͗&D
WsK>d^͗dždžs
W^^d͗ϱϬs
^d͗EK

/Z&>Kt^dͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺWϭ/Z&>Ktххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ/Z&>Kt͗ϭϵϵϮŵs
/Z&>Kt>͗ϵϳй
WϮ/Z&>Ktххͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ /Z&>Kt͗ϭϵϵϮŵs ^dWϭϭϬϬй͗EK
/Z&>Kt>͗ϵϳй
^dWϮϭϬϬй͗EK

WtZ>K<>ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ^ddh^͗KE
hE/dWtZ͗ϭϬϬϬϬt
>/Zd͗EK
Wϭ&t͗ϯ͘ϱϯs
WϮZ&>͗ϭ͘ϱϰs

Z:>K>ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ^z^Z:d>ххͺͺͺͺͺͺZ:>s>͗Ϭй
Z:^E^͗Ϯϳϱŵs
^d^z^ϭϬϬй͗EK

>Z^dKZͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺDKh>d/KE͗&D
WtZ>'/E͗Ϯ͘ϴϭs
>Z^dKZ͗EK

Figure 3-16 SETUP Menu Tree Page 1

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-20 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

^dhWŽŶƚŝŶƵĞĚ


y/dZ^dhWͺͺͺͺͺͺy^>d͗
ydzW͗&>y^dZ
y^>^>͗&D
yWtZ>ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺDKh>d/KE͗&D
yWtZ͗ϭϵϵϬŵs
WtZ>͗ϮϮϲϬŵt
>/Zd͗EK
^dd,Z^,K>͗EK
yKE&/'хх yKE&/'^ƵďŵĞŶƵĂǀĂŝůĂďůĞĨŽƌ&ydžĐŝƚĞƌKE>z
^ĞĞ&ydžĐŝƚĞƌDĂŶƵĂů

EdtKZ<^dhWͺͺͺͺ ZZDZ^^͗ ϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬ


ZZDK͗ ^dd/
ZZ/WZ^^͗ ϭϯϳ͘Ϯϯϳ͘Ϯϰϱ͘ϭϮϬ
ZZ'dtz͗ ϭϯϳ͘Ϯϯϳ͘Ϯϰϱ͘ϵϳ
ZZ^hEdD^<͗ Ϯϱϱ͘Ϯϱϱ͘Ϯϱϱ͘ϭϵϮ
&ZKEdDZ^^͗ ϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬͲϬϬ
&ZKEd/WZ^^͗ ϭϵϮ͘ϭϲϴ͘ϭϭϳ͘ϴϴ
Z^ϰϴϱhZd͗ ϭϭϱϮϬϬ

^hZ/dzͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ ^KD^͗ E>ͬ/^>


>W͗ E>ͬ/^>
^DdW͗ E>ͬ/^>
dZZ͗ E>ͬ/^>

/^W>z^dhWͺͺͺͺͺͺKEdZ^d͗ϮϲͲϰϱ
/^W>zDK͗yWZd

Z^dKZ&h>d^ͺͺ &dZKz^dhW͗EK
&h>d^dhW͗EK

Figure 3-17 SETUP Menu Tree Page 2

3.9 Transmitter Setup/Configuration and Calibration

3.9.1 SETUP>TX CONTROL Menu


The TX CONTROL menu allows for control of the Exciters and IPAs within the FAX transmitter.

Table 3-8 SETUP>TX CONTROL Menu

Menu Description

PWR MODE SET NORM, LOW (Low Power) or UPS; Low power sets RF output at approximately 25% of
Calibrated power; UPS mode asserted from User Remote J1;See Note 1

EXC ON AIR Manually switches exciters A or B to on-air

IPA ON AIR Manually switches IPA A or B to on-air

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-21
January 18, 2021

Table 3-8 SETUP>TX CONTROL Menu

Menu Description

EXC SW MODE Sets Exciter switching mode between AUTO and MANUAL; See Note 2

IPA SW MODE Sets IPA switching mode between AUTO and MANUAL; See Note 2

APC Sets APC mode to ON or OFF; See Note 3

NOTE 1 - The PWR Mode should be left in NORM, this allow for full transmitter power out. The LOW or Low Power
Mode will set the transmitter to approximately quarter power. This can be used for antenna work or anytime the
need for the transmitter to operate at this level. This setting is also available via the remote GUI. The transmitter
will go to this mode automatically under certain fault conditions such as reject load fault or a cooling fault.
Note 2 - If the Exciter and IPA switch modes are set to Auto, the transmitter will still allow the user to manually force
either to the off-air IPA or exciter. However, when the switch mode is set to Manual, the IPA and exciter cannot be
automatically switched. Ensure these are set to AUTO at all times unless performing maintenance.
Note 3 - The APC should always be left to ON. If this is set to OFF, the transmitter power will not be controlled by
APC and TPO will not be maintained to ±0.25 dB. Under certain fault conditions the transmitter controller will shut
the APC off.

3.9.2 SETUP>SYSTEM SETUP Menu


The ID must be set using the Remote GUI. See Section 3.10 for details of how to connect and navigate the Remote
GUI (Station Name).The ID can be up to 20 characters long.
The DATE and TIME menus will allow for them to be changed/updated. The date is entered in mm dd yyyy format.
The Month automatically becomes the first selection. The time is entered as a 24 hour clock however, after entering
the time is displayed as a 12 hour clock. For example, to enter a time of 3:00 PM, enter 15 for hours.

3.9.3 SETUP>TX CONFIGURATION

Table 3-9 SETUP>TX CONFIGURATION Menu


Menu Description

TX MODEL FAX5/7.5/10/20/30/40

FREQ Sets frequency; See Note 1

PWR Sets the calibration of the bargraph on the LCD Home Screen; once forward is set the
reflected will be set to 1.5:1 VSWR based on forward power

DUAL EXCITERS YES for 2 Exciters or NO for Single Exciter; See Note 2

INTERNAL IPA Yes for Internal IPA;NO for IPA BYPASS; Always IPA

AC INPUT 1PH,3D,3Y (Display Only)

Note 1 - FREQ is display only unless using a FAX exciter. In case of the FAX this field is bidirectional between the the
transmitter and Exciter and this setting will actually change transmitter frequency via RS485.
Note 2 - Setting the DUAL EXCITERS to YES will enable AUTO switch function. For correct switching level, refer to
Section 5 to calibrate switching threshold.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-22 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

3.9.4 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE


The TX CALIBRATE Menu allows for calibration of all parameters in the FAX transmitter. The calibration procedures
can be found in Section 5 of this manual.

3.9.5 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>TX POWER CAL Menu


The steps for power calibration are outlined in Section 5 of this manual. These steps should be followed in order to
accurately calibrate your FAX transmitter. There is a calibration point stored for each of the Modulation modes,
FM,FM+HD and HD. If the transmitter is setup to run in more than one mode a power calibration must be completed
for each mode that will be used.
.

Table 3-10 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>TX POWER CAL

Menu Description

MODULATION Transmitter mode to calibrate power in;FM,FM+HD,HD; Set by exciter

TX TPO RF Power to calibrate the transmitter at (TPO)

CALIBRATE Calibrate YES or NO

3.9.6 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>POWER SUPPLY SET


The steps for power calibration are outlined in Section 5 of this manual.There is a power supply setpoint stored for
each of the Modulation modes, FM,FM+HD and HD. If the transmitter is setup to run in more than one mode the
supply voltage must be set for each mode that will be used. All supplies in all of the power blocks will be set to this
voltage.

Warning
THE TRANSMITTER RUNS MOST EFFICIENT AT LOWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES, HOWEVER
THE TRANSMITTER CAN FAULT UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS (FREQUENCY, QUALITY
OF LOAD, ETC) WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE IS SET TOO LOW. TYPICAL
FAULTS WILL BE PA MODULE OVERDRIVE. IF THE TRANSMITTER IS REPORTING THIS
FAULT AND POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE IS SET TO MINIMUM, TRY RAISING THE VOLT-
AGE UP 2 VOLTS TO SEE IF THE PROBLEM CLEARS.

Table 3-11 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>POWER SUPPLY SET

Menu Description

MODULATION Transmitter mode to set power supply voltage;FM,FM+HD,HD Should match exciter
mode.

PS SET Voltage to set the power supply DC output between 44 and 52 VDC in 0.1 Volt steps

SET YES or NO

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-23
January 18, 2021

3.9.7 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>AIRFLOW SET


To set airflow the transmitter fans must be at full speed which is 100% airflow. Also prior to calibrating airflow the air
filters should be checked and cleaned if necessary. See Section 5 of this manual for airflow calibration procedure.
Airflow calibration must be completed for each power block in the transmitter.

Table 3-12 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>AIRFLOW SET

Menu SubMenu Description

PB1 AIRFLOW AIRFLOW Airflow Voltage to ADC (Display Only)

AIRFLOW CAL % of airflow currently being measured by transmitter

SET PB1 100% YES or NO;To set airflow the transmitter fans should be running full speed
which is 100% airflow.

Note
The front door should be closed during the airflow calibration. Under normal conditions the airflow %
typically will be between 75 and 90 %.

3.9.8 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>PWR BLOCK CAL


This procedure is not in the FAX5/7.5/10 menu since there is only one power block and it is calibrated using the TX
PWR CAL menu. In a FAX15/20/30/40 there will be multiple power blocks and voltages for each will appear in the
menu. See Section 5 of this manual for detailed power block calibration procedure.
The power block power cannot be measured directly with an in-line meter, so the power will be estimated based on
transmitter power which should be calibrated prior to calibrating the power block. The power block should be
calibrated at the 2 % above power block power. The following example is for FAX20@ 20 kW:
(TX TPO/# of power blocks) + 2%
(20000/2) = 10000
10000 +(10000* 2%) = 10,200 Watts
The 2% is an estimate of loss in the splitting and combining systems within the FAX.

Table 3-13 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>PWR BLOCK CAL

Menu Description

UNIT PWR 10200W; Power that the power block will be calibrated to.

CALIBRATE YES or NO

PB1 FWD 3.50 V; Calibration reference voltage for power block forward power

PB1 RFLD 1.73V; Calibration reference voltage for power block reflected power

PB2 FWD 3.50 V; Calibration reference voltage for power block forward power

PB2 RFLD 1.73V; Calibration reference voltage for power block reflected power

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-24 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

3.9.9 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>REJ LOAD CAL


Reject load calibration will only be in FAX15/20/30/40 models. It is used to calibrate the power into the power block
combiner reject load (6 kW) and the cabinet combiner reject load (12 kW). There will be multiple Reject Loads in the
FAX30/40 models. See Section 5of this manual for detailed Reject Load calibration procedure.

Table 3-14 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>REJ LOAD CAL

Menu Description

REJ LEVEL 0%;Power that is currently input to reject load (Display Only)

REJ SENSE 275 mV; Voltage from reject load detector that is on Fan Control Board (Display Only)

SET SYS 100% YES or NO

3.9.10 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>CAL RESTORE


Used to restore last calibration stored in memory. Only one is stored. If a calibration is completed, ie forward or
reflected power, and it is not correct restore will not correct the problem. Calibration will be required again.

Table 3-15 SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>CAL RESTORE

Menu Description

MODULATION Mode transmitter is in, FM, FM+HD or HD

POWERCAL GAIN Calibration Gain setting for transmitter (Display only)

CAL RESTORE YES or NO

3.9.11 SETUP>EXCITER SETUP


Allows for setup and power calibration for each exciter. Also to set the Threshold where the exciter switches to the
backup.

Table 3-16 SETUP>EXCITER SETUP


Menu Submenu Description

EXC SELECTED A or B; Set to on-air exciter; See Note 1

EXC TYPE Set to Exciter type; DIGIT,FLEXSTAR,FAX,


MICROMAX,SUPERCITER, CUST DRV,CUST IPA; See Note 2

EXC SLC SEL NA,FM or HD; See Note 3

EXC PWR CAL MODULATION FM,FM+HD or HD Display Only of current exciter mode

EXC PWR 1990mV; See Note 4

EPWR CAL 2260mW: Power to cal at, should match EXC PWR above

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-25
January 18, 2021

Table 3-16 SETUP>EXCITER SETUP

Menu Submenu Description

CALIBRATE YES OF NO; See Note 5

SET THRESHOLD YES or NO; See note 6

EXC CONFIG FAX Exciter ONLY; See FAX Compact manual 888-2739-
001

Note 1 - Selecting Exciter A or B in this menu does not change the on-air exciter. This allows for setup up of the
exciter that is currently on-air, not for calibrating the off-air exciter. Ensure that the correct exciter is selected in this
menu.
Note 2 - Exciter type must match the exciter model for the exciter selected. For GatesAir products, the list is filled
with models currently available. For non-GatesAir exciters, select either CUST DRV or CUST IPA.
CUST DRV is for non-GatesAir exciters that have an external APC input that can accept 0-4.75 VDC. The exciter must
have a fast enough APC response time to allow the exciter to vary its output power with respect to this voltage. The
transmitter will increase this APC voltage when it requires more drive and decrease this voltage when it requires less
drive. When using CUST DRV, the IPA within the FAX is set for maximum gain. If trying to run in the FM+HD or HD
modes, this setting is required.
CUST IPA is for non-GatesAir exciters that do not have an external APC input. In this mode, the exciter will put out a
fixed drive using its internal APC and the APC from the transmitter will drive the FAX IPA. This mode cannot be used
for any HD modes. If using CUST IPA dipswitch S1-5 on PA Backplane board 1(top board) where the IPA plugs in must
be set to ON. This passes the APC voltage to the IPA.

Note
If using a FAX Compact Class exciter with software greater that A24 be sure to set the TX type to FAX in
the Setup > Exc Setup > TX Type. Refer to manual 888-2739-001 for more information.

Note 3 - EXC SLC SEL is used only for Split Level Combined systems. This setting will depend on the mode of the FAX
in SLC operation, NA for non-SLC applications.
Note 4 - The exciter voltage will be set bu the scaling in the exciter. In GatesAir exciters it is typically set to 4 VDC=x
Watts. This voltage should be set as close as possible to 2000 mV at TPO when dual exciters are used.
Note 5 - Exciter calibration must be completed for each mode of operation that will be used by the transmitter.
Note that the exciter calibration is in milliwatts not watts. Most GatesAir exciters display in Watts.
Note 6 - The threshold setup is for dual exciter systems only and sets the point were changeover occurs. The actual
switchover is based on the voltage from the exciter and the threshold can be set in the range of 100 mV to 2000 mV.
If outside that range the default is 40 % of the calibrated voltage.

3.9.12 SETUP>NETWORK SETUP


The network setup page refers only to the rear Ethernet port of the FAX transmitter.
The following ports are used in the FAX transmitter.
Webserver - Port 80 TCP/UDP
Telnet - Port 23 TCP/UDP
SNMP - Port 161 TCP/UDP (User configurable 161, 162, 49152 to 65535)
SNMP Traps - Port 162 TCP/UDP

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-26 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Table 3-17 SETUP>NETWORK SETUP

Menu Description

REAR MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00; Display only


ADDRESS

REAR MODE STATIC or DHCP

REAR IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.10

REAR SUBBNET 255.255.255.0


MASK

REAR GATEWAY 192.168.1.1

FRONT MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00; Display only;See Note 1


ADDRESS

FRONT IP ADDRESS 192.168.117.88; Display only

RS485 BAUD RATE 115200 or 312500; when used with FAX Exciter ONLY, must match exciter

Warning
IF THE REAR ETHERNET PORT IS CHANGED FROM STATIC TO DHCP WITHOUT A VALID
DHCP NETWORK CONNECTION THE CONTROLLER MAY LOCK UP AND REQUIRE A
RESET.

Note 1 - The front panel Ethernet port is setup as a DHCP server and a LAN should NOT be connected to this port.
This port is setup for local test and monitoring and the default IP address is factory set to 192.168.117.88. It will
automatically assign the computer an IP address on its subnet. To make any changes to the setup via the front
Ethernet port, REMOTE must be disabled.
If a remote control connection is to be made via IP, the rear Ethernet port should be used for this purpose. Using the
SETUP>NETWORK SETUP menu, the rear Ethernet port parameters can be changed. These parameters include IP
address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and Mode.
To access the GUI a simple web browser can be used. To login and navigate the Remote GUI see 3.10 Remote
Graphical User Interface (GUI) of this manual.

3.9.13 SETUP>DISPLAY SETUP


The contrast of the display can be adjusted on software versions starting with A74. The range is numerically from 26
to 45, with 45 being the most contrast and 26 being very little contrast. After highlighting the Contrast line to enable
it, use the up/down navigation buttons to change the contrast number, then select APPLY to save that setting. The
contrast will revert back to the previous setting if it has not been applied within 20 seconds.
Display mode can be either EXPERT or NOVICE. Setting Display Mode to Novice locks out the ability to change the
transmitter setup and controls within the Setup menu. This screen is not password protected and accessible by
anyone.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-27
January 18, 2021

3.9.14 SETUP>SECURITY
Selecting Security from the Setup menu displays the Security menu. Selecting a menu option on the Security menu
to enable or disable the corresponding feature.
Table 3-18 SETUP>SECURITY

Menu Description
Sec Coms Enable/Disable encrypted communication between the web client and the web server.
LDAP Enable/discable user authentication using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
Enable/Disable access control table used to limit access to the transmitter to only trusted
ACT REAR
management stations identified by their IP address.
Enable / Disable protocol filters can be used to block the corresponding protocol packets on the
PROTOCOL FILTERS
rear interface.
EMAIL Configure email messages when a fault or warning occurs in the system.
NETWORK STATISTICS Displays statistics from the different layers of the networking software.
Displays collection of dynamic entries that are created as the networking software resolves IP
ARP CACHE
addresses into Ethernet MAC addresses.

3.9.15 SETUP>RESTORE DEFAULTS


Restore defaults allows the user to restore the factory setup, which is the way the transmitter shipped after final
test.

3.10 Remote Graphical User Interface (GUI)


The Remote GUI can be accessed from either the front or rear Ethernet port on the FAX transmitter. It requires a
login on both ports. This login screen is shown in Figure 3-18.
The Front Ethernet port is a DHCP Server, it should not be connected to the LAN/WAN or IP addressing problems will
occur. The front Ethernet port IP address is 192.168.117.88 and is coded into the software so the user cannot
change it. See Section 3.7.12 for setting up the rear Ethernet port.

Figure 3-18 Remote GUI Login Screen

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-28 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Note
Depending on the version of software the factory default LOGIN’s and PASSWORD’s may be different.
Beginning in August 2013 these were changed. See below for more details. Old passwords will be
retained when upgrading.

Beginning August 2013:


From the login screen there are three logins that are set at the factory. The passwords are case sensitive and max 9
characters.
Engineer Login 1 - Username: gates; Password: gates
Engineer Login 2 - Username: user2; Password: pass2
Engineer Login 3 - Username: user3; Password: pass3
Engineer Login 4 - Username: user4; Password: pass4
Administration Login - Username: admin; Password: admin
The Engineer logins allow full control and monitoring of the transmitter.
To make changes via the Front Ethernet port, REMOTE must be set to Disable. If connecting to the rear Ethernet
port REMOTE must be set to Enable.
The Administration login, Figure 3-19, allows for the user to setup the passwords for the Engineer logins, set the
password for the netadmin login, and the set the timeout for the GUI. The netadmin username and password can
be changed.

Prior to August 2013:


From the login screen there are three logins that are set at the factory. The passwords are case sensitive and max 9
characters.
Engineer Login 1 - Username: admin; Password: admin
Engineer Login 2 - Username: user2; Password: pass2
Administration Login - Username: netadmin; Password: harris
The Engineer logins allow full control and monitoring of the transmitter.
To make changes on either Front Ethernet port, REMOTE must be set to Disable.
The Administration login, allows for the user to setup the passwords for the Engineer logins, set the password for
the netadmin login, and the set the timeout for the GUI.

Figure 3-19 Administration login Screen

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-29
January 18, 2021

3.11 GUI HOME SCREEN


After the user has correctly entered one of the two Engineer login/password combinations the GUI will open at the
FAX Home screen shown in Figure 3-20. All of the configuration settings available are under the SYSTEM button on
the home screen. Each of these menus will be described in the following sections. The other buttons are for control
and monitoring, these are the same parameters that were discussed in the LCD menu tree Sections above. It is best
for the users to navigate through these to get familiar where to find information about each section of the
transmitter.

Figure 3-20 GUI Home Screen


The buttons on the right side of the home screen are for monitoring, setup and control. Each button will take the
user to a submenu (s). A static display of the “On”,“Off”, “Raise” and “Lower” controls are always available to the
right of the GUI. The “Remote Enable/Disable” is not configurable via the GUI but is displayed to show the current
operating state. No changes can be made and no control is available unless a valid Engineer login is used. If using
the rear Ethernet port Remote must be enabled and if using the front Ethernet port Remote must be disabled.
Transmitter ID - The middle of the top bar shows the ID, this can be changed in the SYSTEM>SERVICE> menu. The
Station ID can be up to 20 characters long.
Transmitter Model - Top bar on the right side shows the model of FAX 5/7.5/10/20/30/40.
Event Log - Displays the Event Log
FWD 100% Mark - The vertical bar in the power bargraph reflected power display is 100% power based on the
“Nominal Power (w) in the SYSTEM>SETUP Menu. This can also be changed in the SETUP menu on the LCD. This is
not necessarily the power the transmitter was calibrated at.
RFLD 100% Mark - The vertical bar in the power bargraph display for reflected power is 100% power based 1.5:1
VSWR of the calibrated power.
Mode - shows the current operating mode of the transmitter, FM, FM+HD,HD or SLC. Display Only.
Frequency - Shows current operating frequency of the transmitter entered into the FAX. For FAX exciters this
changes the exciter frequency via RS485. For all other exciters it is display only and to see current frequency the
operator must refer to the exciter frequency.

The icons in the middle of the screen are analogous to the buttons on the right side of the display. If one or more of
the icons are red, that icon can be clicked on and the user can drill into the submenus to find a particular fault. The
fault log can also be viewed under the SYSTEM menu by clicking the SYSTEM button and navigating to the fault log.
The Primary Faults will turn Red when any of the events shown changes state.
AC Mains - Faults when the AC line voltage to the main power supplies drops below 190 VAC on any phase.
External Interlock - Turns red when the External Interlock on the Remote connector J1-24 and J1-25 are not closed.
VSWR - Faults at VSWR of 1.5:1
Exciter Trip - Displays the status of the internal Exciter switchover relay.
IPA Trip - Displays the status of the internal IPA switchover relay.
Foldback - Warning at 1.3:1 VSWR (factory Default). This setting can be changed in the GUI SYSTEM>SERVICE Menu.
The range is 1.3 to 1.5.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-30 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

3.11.1 Event Log Menu


The Fault/Event log in software revisions prior to Application code 24 was strictly a Fault log. The log is shown in
Figure 3-21. Faults are shown as active, in red, and cleared with date and time. To reset the log click on the Reset Log
button. To display only Active Faults click on the Active Faults button.
There are separate Event/Fault logs that contain advanced information that is unavailable in the GUI Log, see
Section 3.11.1.1 below.

Figure 3-21 GUI Fault/Event Log Screen


The Fault/Event log in software revisions prior to Application code 24 was strictly a Fault log. The log is shown in
Figure 3-21. Faults are shown as active, in red, and cleared with date and time. To reset the log click on the Reset Log
button. To display only Active Faults click on the Active Faults button.
The first fault in Figure 3-21 shows that PA4 was out in power block 1 (PB1). The fault occurred at 15:41:41 on 10/02/
12. It was cleared at 14:41:42 on 10/02/12.

The events can be filter by clicking on any of the letters in the [AC / FWIA].
A = Active Faults
C = Cleared Faults
F = Faults
W = Warnings
I = Information
A = Action
Clicking the floppy disk icon will open a new tab in the web browser, this can then be saved as a text file, html file or
copy and pasted into excel.

Clicking on the printer icon will allow the event log to be printed to an installed printer.

3.11.1.1 HTML Event/Fault Logs

The HTML logs are an advanced diagnostic tool for troubleshooting that GatesAir Customer Service may request be
inspected and contain some advanced information that is not available in the LCD menu log or the GUI Event log.
These can be obtained by typing the following (case sensitive):

IP Address/faultLog.html example: 192.168.117.88/faultLog.html - Fault log from front Ethernet port

These logs are cleared on AC power cycle or Clear Log button clears the logs.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-31
January 18, 2021

The html navigation buttons on the left will be described below.


• HOME - This buttom will take you to the transmitter GUI Home Screen.
• ISP - This button will allow you to upload software files into the transmitter.

Figure 3-22 ISP html screen

• Json Data - This button will open a new browser window to show JavaScript Object Notation information
used for advance diagnostics. Json represents data as key-value pairs, which can be easily converted to and
from JavaScript objects.
• XML Data - This button will open a new browser window that displays all the datapoints from the transmitter
at that moment.
• Active Faults - This takes you to the Active Faults screen.

Figure 3-23 faultLog.html

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-32 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

• Fault Log - This button will open a new browser window and display an EVENT LOG. On this screen you can
toggle between All and Active events.

Figure 3-24 Event Log

• Event Log - This is an advanced diagnostic event log for GatesAir Service.

Figure 3-25 Advanced Diagnostic Event Log

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-33
January 18, 2021

• Server Log - This is an advanced diagnostic server log for GatesAir Service

Figure 3-26 Advanced Diagnostic Server Log

• View EEPROM - This button opens a new browser window to display the EEPROM .s19 code.
• Download EEPROM - This button will download the EEPROM .s19 file
• Revisions - This buttom will open a new window to display the software revision.

Figure 3-27 Revision html

3.11.2 System>System Setup Menu

Figure 3-28 System Setup Screen


Frequency - Set in the LCD SETUP menu. Sets the exciter frequency when used with FAX exciter. All other exciters
this is display only.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-34 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Nominal Power - Sets the 100% mark on Bargraph for forward power
Number of Exciters - Must be set to 2 for dual exciter mode. This will enable auto switching functionality
Internal IPA - Always set to YES (Future Need)
AC Mains - Display only, has no effect on transmitter operation
VSWR Foldback - Sets the foldback point between 1.3:1 and 1.5:1. Factory default setting is 1.3. This setting affects
only the transmitter VSWR not each individual power block VSWR. The power blocks are set to foldback at 1.5:1 in
FAX15/20/30/40.
Fwd Pwr Warn Thresh (dB) - If RF power out drops below the threshold a Warning will be generated and Bargraph
will turn Yellow. Range -3.0 to -0.2 dB from calibrated power.
Fwd Pwr Fault Thresh (dB) - If RF power out drops below this threshold a Fault will be generated and Bargraph will
turn Red. Range -3.0 to -0.2 dB from calibrated power.

3.11.3 System>System Setup>System Service Menu

Figure 3-29 TIME Screen


Station Name - Up to 20 characters

Note
On software versions prior to A19, no special characters (*,&,_,etc) can be entered into the Station Name
Filed or the GUI will be disabled. Contact Customer Service if this occurs.

Model Number - Set at factory


Serial Number - Set at the factory
Feature Key - Sets up the options that are installed in the exciter. Contact GatesAir Service for details
Date/Time - Sets the clock in the transmitter. Disabled when NTP is enabled. See Section 3.12.10 for NTP Config.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-35
January 18, 2021

3.11.4 System>System Setup>System Config Menu

Figure 3-30 System Config Screen


Programmable Output 1-4 - Allows for 4 Remote I/O outputs on J1 User Remote to be user configured. Drop down
box shows available settings.
Exciter Configuration - Allows for selecting the exciter type for each exciter in service. Drop down box shows
available settings.

3.12 System>System Setup>Network Menu


From the Network Settings screen you can access IP Addressing, Ethernet Settings, SNMP, ACT ARP Cache, Configure
email settings, look at Network Stats, LDAP and Secure Communications.

Note
Be sure to click Save before exiting screen or changes will be lost. Save will appear once changes are
made.

Figure 3-31 Network Settings Screen

3.12.1 System>Network Settings>IP Addressing


The port settings can be changed in the System Network Settings page with firmware A69 or later.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-36 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-32 IP Addressing


Rear Ethernet Port
Address Type - Select DHCP or Static to enter a status IP address below.
Address - IP address assigned by network in DHCP or by user in Static; ie - 10.10.10.10.
Subnet Mask - Subnet Mask assigned by network in DHCP or by user in Static; ie - 255.255.255.0.
Gateway - Default Gateway assigned by network in DHCP or by user in Static; ie - 10.10.10.1.
DNS Server - Address of desired DNS Server.
HTTP Port - Enter the open port to use.

Front Ethernet Port


MAC Address - MAC address of the Front Ethernet port, assigned at factory
Subnet Mask - 192.168.117.88 coded in software and cannot be changed

3.12.2 System>Ethernet Settings


If using the NTP setting for more accurate time and date, an IP address of a NTP time server must be entered. A list
of time server IP addresses can be obtained from NIST. If the network that is the FAX is connected to does not have a
NTP server then a connection to the Internet is required.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-37
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-33 Ethernet Interfaces


Link Status - Link Status
MAC Address - MAC address of the Rear and Front Ethernet port
Auto Negotiation - Select ON or OFF
10/100 Mbps Speed - Select desired speed
Mode - Select Full or Half Duplex

3•12•2•1 Protocol Filters

In addition to the access control filter, the protocol filters can be used to block the corresponding protocol packets
on the rear interface. The protocols that can be filtered are SNMP, Telnet, ICMP, and HTTP or HTTPS. Disabling the
HTTP and HTTPS protocols can only be done by connecting to the web interface through the front ethernet
interface. The protocol filter controls are on the Ethernet Settings page.

3.12.3 System>Network Settings>SNMP Menu


The GatesAir transmitter family supports monitoring and alarming functionality via SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). SNMP versions V1 and V2c are implemented. MIB’s are available on the GatesAir Customer
Portal at www.gatesair.com

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-38 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-34 SNMP Screen

MIBs - Base MIB is Standard GatesAir Transmitter MIB. IRT MIB is extended MIB, with functions for Dual Exciters.
Check box to enable MIB.Un-checked disables MIB.
Port - Default is 161 (range is 161,162,49152-65535)
RD Community - Default set to Public
RW Community - Write Community Private or Public; Default set to Private
SNMP Version - FAX allows for version 1 or 2c only
Trap 1-3 - IP address of SNMP trap receiver. Port 162 is default trap port, not changeable. Community Public or
Private.

The GatesAir MIB’s are usable in all NMS (Network Management Systems) and is provided in text-format. The
advantage of this monitoring system is, that there is no difference between the monitoring of various GatesAir
equipment. Once the MIB is integrated into the NMS, all different devices can be monitored via the central station.

The GatesAir MIB files, Base and IRT, for use with SNMP connectivity are available on the GatesAir Customer Portal
at www.support.gatesair.com (registration required)

3.12.4 System>Network>Access Control Table


The access control table can be used to limit access to the transmitter to only trusted management stations
identified by their IP address. The access control table only applies to packets received over the rear ethernet
interface.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-39
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-35 Access Control Table


When the table is empty, any computer or management station can access the transmitter. Adding entry to the table
consists of specifying the IP address and subnet mask of the management station or stations that are allowed
access. With the subnet mask, the entry can allow a single station (e.g. 255.255.255.255) or all stations on a specific
subnet. For example, an entry with the IP address of 192.168.1.x and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0, where x is any
number, will allow entry to any management station whose IP address has the first three octets “192.168.1”.
Entries in the table can be individually enabled and the whole table can be enabled. If the table is enabled and an
entry in the table is disabled, the entry will have no effect. Similarly, if an entry is enabled but the table is disabled,
the entry will have no effect. A user must be logged in to make changes to the access control table.

ACT Enable - Click on the or button to change whether the table is enabled. The button color and
text are indicators of the enable state of the table.
Add - Click on the button to add a new entry to the table. The dialog box is displayed where the IP address,
subnet mask, and the enabled state of the entry are specified. Clicking on the “Ok” button adds the entry while
clicking on “Cancel” aborts adding a table entry.

Figure 3-36 ACT Add Dialog Box


Edit an Entry - Click on the icon to change a table entry.
Delete an Entry - Click on the icon to remove an entry from the table.
Open Server Pinholes - Checking the Open Server Pinholes checkbox tells the access control table software to allow
a response from the LDAP, NTP, DNS, and SMTP (email) servers through the access control table firewall even if

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-40 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

there’s no table entry matching the IP address of the server. Often, the address of one of these servers is a fully
qualified domain name (pool.ntp.org for example) for which the server’s IP address is unknown. In addition, the IP
address that corresponds to the domain name can change without notice making it difficult to add an entry in the
table for the server. When opening server pinholes is enabled, the software will add automatically add a temporary
entry to the table after resolving a server’s domain name to an IP address before sending a message to the server.
Once it receives the server’s response, or the conversation times out, the software removes the temporary entry
from the table. Temporary entries are not displayed.

3.12.5 System>Network>ARP Chache


The address resolution protocol (ARP) cache is a collection of dynamic entries that are created as the networking
software resolves IP addresses into Ethernet MAC addresses. ARP cache entries are deleted over time forcing the
mapping between IP address and Ethernet MAC address to be learned again. This corrects for cases where the
mapping may have changed. Viewing the ARP table can help solve intermittent communication issues caused by
duplicate IP addresses or invalid entries. Clearing the ARP cache can sometimes correct these types of problems.
The entries in the address resolution protocol (ARP) cache can now be viewed on the ARP Cache page. The cache can
be cleared by selecting the “Clear Cache” button.

Figure 3-37 ARP Cache

3.12.6 System>Network>Email Config


The latest software now supports the generation of email messages when a fault or warning occurs in the system.
When enabled, the transmitter will send an email when the event occurs and another message when the event
clears.
Email Configuration - Email can be sent to up to five email addresses, and the email can be sent through secure
email servers using transport layer security (TLS). The body of the email is formatted in HTML. Email configuration
settings can be tested by clicking on the “Send Test Message” button.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-41
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-38 Email Configuration 1/2

Figure 3-39 Email Configuration 2/2


Email Server - This field specifies the address of the email server. This can be either a fully qualified domain name
such as smtp.gmail.com or an IP address.
Email Server IP - This read-only field shows the IP address of the email server. This is useful when the email server
address is specified as a domain name.
Email Server Port - Specifies the port number that needs to be used to communicate to the email server. For non-
secure servers, the port number is usually 25 while port 587 is usually used for secure servers.
Email Server Status - The server status shows the result of the last attempt to send email through the email server
either by a test message or an email generated because of an event.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-42 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Email Notification - This allows email notification to be enabled or disabled.


Attachment - Selecting enable for this field causes the entire event log to be attached to the email as an attachment,
not embedded in the email.
Fault - This controls if an email is generated on fault events.
Warning - This controls if an email is generated on warning events.
TLS - The TLS field controls whether the email server requires communications using transport layer security.
To - This is the receiving email address. Up to five receiving email addresses can be entered.
From - This is the email address put in the “From” field of the email.
Subject - This is the text used for the subject line of the email.
Server Domain - This is the domain of the email server, usually the same as what is put in the “Email Server” field.
Server Login - This is the login name for the email account on the server. This field should be left blank if the email
server is non-secure.
Server Password - This is the password for the email account on the server. This filed should be left blank if the email
server is non-secure.
Message Footer - This is text that will appear at the bottom of every email message. The body of the email is limited
to 500 characters, and depending on the event description, the body of the email can consume over 400 characters.
Any characters left after the body of the email has been created is available for the message footer. If the message
footer string is longer than the number of available characters, it is truncated.

3.12.7 System>Network>Network Statistics


You can view statistics from the different layers of the networking software on the network statistics
screen. Clicking on the different tabs displays the statistics kept for that part of the networking software.

Figure 3-40 Network Statistics

3•12•7•1 IP Receive Statistics

Packet - the number of IP packets received


Delivered - the number of received IP packets sent up the protocol stack to a waiting software application

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-43
January 18, 2021

Forwarded - the number of IP packets received on the interface and then forwarded to another IP address.
Discarded for lack of resources - the number of received IP packets dropped because there was not enough memory
to process them. This should normally be 0.
Discarded due to internal errors - the number of received IP packets dropped because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of received IP packets dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of received IP packets dropped for other reasons such as errors in the
packet header, a bad destination address, the time-to-live (TTL) for the packet had expired, or the packet was
blocked because of the access control table configuration.
Header errors - the number of received IP packets dropped because of an error in the packet header.
Illegal destination errors - the number of received IP packets dropped because of a bad destination address.
Unknown protocols - the number of received IP packets dropped because the packet had a protocol number not
supported by the protocol stack.
Fragments receive - the number of IP packet fragments received.
Fragments reassembled - the number of IP packet fragments reassembled into a complete IP packet.
Fragments discarded - the number of IP packet fragments dropped because an error occurred trying to reassemble
the fragment into a packet.

3•12•7•2 IP Transmit Statistics

Packets - the number of IP packets transmitted.


Unsent for lack of resources - the number of IP packets not transmitted because there was not enough memory to
process it. This should normally be 0.
Unsent due to internal errors - the number of IP packets not transmitted because of errors internal to the protocol
stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of IP packets not transmitted because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.
Destination found unreachable - the number of IP packets not transmitted because the destination IP address could
not be reached.
Packets fragmented - the number of IP packets that had to be fragmented to be transmitted.
Fragments - the number of IP packet fragments created.
Fragmentation Failures - the number of errors that occurred while trying to fragment a transmit IP packet. This
should normally be 0.

3•12•7•3 TCP Receive Statistics

Packets - the number of TCP packets received


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of received TCP packets dropped because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded due to internal errors - the number of received TCP packets dropped because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of received TCP packets dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally be
0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of received TCP packets dropped for other reasons such as a bad
destination address or the packet was dropped because of a protocol filter setting.
Header errors - the number of received TCP packets dropped because of an error in the header.
Acks of unsent data - the number of TCP acknowledgement packets received for data that was not sent. This should
normally be 0.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-44 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

With data outside window - the number of TCP packets received with a sequence number outside of the current
window.
With data after close - the number of TCP packets received with data after the TCP connection has been closed.
Segments with data - the number of TCP packets received with data
Segments with duplicate data - the number of TCP packets received with data that was already acknowledged.
Segments with only an ACK - the number of TCP acknowledgement packets received that did not also contain data.
Segments with duplicate ACK - the number of TCP packets received that with an acknowledgement that has already
been received.
Segments with RST - the number TCP packets received with the RST flag set.
Window probes - the number of times the sender requested the TCP stack to respond with its window size
Window updates - the number of times a TCP packet was received with an updated window size.

3•12•7•4 TCP Connection Statistics

Active opens - the number of TCP connections created by the TCP stack using the SYN message.
Passive opens - the number of TCP connections created by the TCP stack opening a TCP socket and listening for a
connection request from a TCP client.
Currently established - the number of TCP connections that have been established since the transmitter was power
cycled.
Gracefully closed - the number of TCP connections that closed cleanly with the FIN flag.
Aborted - the number of TCP connections that were closed with RST segment.
Failed connection attempts - the number of attempted TCP connections that were not successful.

3•12•7•5 UDP Receive Statistics

Packets - the number of received UDP packets


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of received UDP packets dropped because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded due to internal errors - the number of received UDP packets dropped because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of received UDP packets dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally be
0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of received UDP packets dropped for other reasons such as a bad
destination address or the packet was dropped because of a protocol filter setting.
Header errors - the number of received UDP packets dropped because of an error in the header.
With unknown ports - the number of received UDP packets dropped because there was no application listening to
that port.
Blocked - the number of received UDP packets dropped because of a protocol filter setting.

3•12•7•6 UDP Transmit Statistics

Packets - the number of UDP packets transmitter.


Unsent for lack of resources - the number of UDP packets not transmitted because of errors internal to the protocol
stack. This should normally be 0.
Unsent due to internal errors - the number of UDP packets not transmitted because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of UDP packets not transmitted because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-45
January 18, 2021

With illegal destination port - the number of UDP packets not transmitted because the destination port was 0. This
should normally be 0.

3•12•7•7 ICMP Receive Statistics

Packets - the number of ICMP packets received.


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded due to internal errors - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally be
0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of received ICMP packets dropped for other reasons such as a bad
destination address or the packet was dropped because of a protocol filter setting.
Header errors - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because of an error in the header such as a bad
checksum.
Unrecognized codes - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because the ICMP code in the packet is not
defined.
Redirects from non gateways - the number of received ICMP redirect packets that were sent from an entity that is
not the default gateway.
Destination unreachables - the number of ICMP packets received with a “destination unreachable” type.
Time exceeded - the number of ICMP packets received with a “time exceeded” type.
Parameter problems - the number of ICMP packets received with a “parameter problem” type.
Source quenches - the number of ICMP packets received with a “source quench” type.
Redirects - the number of ICMP packets received with a “redirect” type.
Echo requests - the number of ICMP packets received with a “echo request” type, i.e. a “ping” packet.
Echo replies - the number of ICMP packets received with a “echo reply” type, i.e. a “ping response” packet.
Timestamp requests - the number of ICMP packets received with a “timestamp request” type. This should normally
be 0.
Timestamp replies - the number of ICMP packets received with a “timestamp reply” type. This should normally be 0.
Info requests - the number of ICMP packets received with a “info request” type. This message type has been
deprecated, so this number should normally be 0.
Info reply - the number of ICMP packets received with a “info reply” type. This message type has been deprecated,
so this number should normally be 0.
Unknown - the number of ICMP packets received with an unknown message type.
Blocked - the number of ICMP packets because of a protocol filter.

3•12•7•8 ICMP Transmit Statistics

Packets - the number of ICMP packets transmitted.


Unsent for lack of resources - the number of ICMP packets not transmitted because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Unsent due to internal errors - the number of ICMP packets not transmitted because of errors internal to the
protocol stack. This should normally be 0.
Error - the number of ICMP packets not transmitted because of an operating system error. This should normally be
0.
With illegal type or code - the number of ICMP packets not transmitted because the packet had an undefined
message type or code. This should normally be 0.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-46 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Echo requests - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “echo request” type, i.e. a “ping” packet.
Echo replies - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “echo reply” type, i.e. a “ping response” packet.
Timestamp requests - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “timestamp request” type. This should
normally be 0.
Timestamp replies - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “timestamp reply” type. This should normally
be 0.
Info requests - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “info request” type. This message type has been
deprecated, so this number should normally be 0.
Info reply - the number of ICMP packets transmitted with a “info reply” type. This message type has been
deprecated, so this number should normally be 0.
Unknown - the number of ICMP packets not transmitted because the packet had an unknown message type.

3•12•7•9 Interface (INTF) Receive Statistics

Packets - the number of ethernet frames received on the interface.


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of received ethernet frames dropped because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of received ethernet frames dropped for other reasons such as a bad
checksum.
Internal errors - the number of received ICMP packets dropped because of errors such as the frame size exceeded
the maximum size allowed.
Error - the number of received ethernet frames dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally
be 0.
Total bytes - the number of bytes transmitted out of the interface since the last power cycle.
Unicast packets - the number of frames received from a unicast ethernet address.
Multicast packets - the number of frames received from a multicast ethernet address.
Broadcast packets - the number of frames received from a broadcast ethernet address.

3•12•7•10 Interface (INTF) Transmit Statistics

Packets - the number of frames transmitted out of the interface.


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of ethernet frames not transmitted because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of ethernet frames not transmitted for other reasons such as a bad
checksum.
Internal errors - the number of frames not transmitted because of an error creating the ethernet frame. This should
normally be 0.
Error - the number of frames not transmitted because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.
Total bytes - the total number of bytes transmitted out of the interface since the last power cycle.
Unicast packets - the number of frames transmitted to a unicast ethernet address.
Multicast packets - the number of frames transmitted to a multicast ethernet address.
Broadcast packets - the number of frames transmitted to a broadcast ethernet address.

3•12•7•11 ARP Receiver Statistics

Packets - the number of ARP packets received.


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of ARP packets dropped because there was not enough memory to
process it. This should normally be 0.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-47
January 18, 2021

Discarded for other reasons - the number of ARP packets dropped for other reasons.
Internal errors - the number of ARP packets dropped because of an error internal to the protocol stack. This should
normally be 0.
Error - the number of ARP packets dropped because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.
Valid ARP requests received - the number of ARP requests received destined for this interface.
Valid ARP replies received - the number of ARP replies received for which a request was sent out this interface.

3•12•7•12 ARP Transmit Statistics

Packets - The number of ARP packets transmitted out this interface.


Discarded for lack of resources - the number of ARP packets not transmitted because there was not enough
memory to process it. This should normally be 0.
Discarded for other reasons - the number of ARP packets not transmitted for other reasons.
Internal errors - the number of ARP packets not transmitted because of an error internal to the protocol stack. This
should normally be 0.
Error - the number of ARP packets not transmitted because of an operating system error. This should normally be 0.
ARP request - the number of ARP requests transmitted out this interface.
APR replies - the number of ARP replies transmitted out this interface.
ARP alloc_returned NULL - the number of times an entry could not be added to the ARP cache
ARP cache hits - the number of times an IP address was found in the ARP cache.
ARP cache misses - the number of times an IP address was not found in the ARP cache.
Discarded due to missing entry - the number of times a packet was not transmitted because the ARP cache entry
associated with the destination expired.

3.12.8 System>Network>LDAP
User authentication is available using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). When enabled, user login
credentials are transmitted to an authentication server, such as X.500 or Active Directory, for authentication. If the
server denies entry to those credentials, the software compares the credentials against the local user database. This
prevents customers from being unable to access the transmitter if communication to the X.500 server is down. The
configuration screen for LDAP is accessible from the Network Settings screen.
In LDAP, a globally unique user entry is represented by what is called a distinguished name or “DN”. The
distinguished name is constructed by concatenating a sequence of relative distinguished name (RDN) attribute
values such as their organization, common name, and country. Each RDN attribute consists of a label followed by the
equal sign and then the attribute value. An example of the DN might be
cn=John Smith,ou=Engineering,company=GatesAir,c=USA
where “cn” is the common name, “ou” is the person’s organization, “company” is the company that the person
works for, and “c” is the country where they are located.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-48 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-41 LDAP Setup 1/2

Figure 3-42 LDAP Setup 2/2


Authentication - This enables authentication using LDAP protocol to a X.500 server.
Server Name - The Server Name field configures the DNS name for the X.500 server. This can also be an IP address.
Server IP - The Server IP field displays the IP address of the X.500 server. This is useful when the server was specified
using a DNS name as opposed to an IP address so that the customer can see the server’s corresponding IP address.
This field is read-only.
Port - This specifies the UDP port number on which the X.500 server is listening for LDAP communication. Secure
communications normally use port 636 while port 389 is normally used for non-secure LDAP.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-49
January 18, 2021

Password - This field specifies the password that needs to be provided when binding with the X.500 server during
the LDAP procotol exchange. This is not the same thing as the password used in a user’s authentication credentials.
User DN - The user distinguished name (DN) indicates the LDAP interchange format fields that need to be used
during the authentication process. This string would be provided by the administrator for the X.500 server.
DC String - The domain component (DC) string specifies the path to the user domain object in the authentication
server’s directory. The “ou” field in the DC string specifies an organizational unit, and the “dc” fields specify
components of DNS domain name. This string would be provided by the administrator for the X.500 server.
Name Attribute - This identifies the attribute to use to identify the user ID for the user’s credentials. An “=” sign is
automatically appended to this field. This string would be provided by the administrator for the X.500 server.
Encryption - The encryption field specifies if the LDAP protocol exchange should be encrypted using transport layer
security (TLS).
Test Server - Pressing this button initiates a test where the LDAP client in the transmitter attempts to bind with the
authentication server. This consists of initiating a conversation with the server where the LDAP version and server
password are exchanged. No user DN is exchanged. The status of the bind attempted is displayed next to the test
button.

3.12.9 System>Network>Secure Comms


Encrypted communication in the FAX is between the web client and the web server. For better performance, the
encrypted communication uses a technology called “secure web sockets”. In addition, only commands from the web
client to the server and sensitive data sent back to the client are sent over the encrypted channel. The initial loading
of web pages and files and other non-sensitive data such as meter data is done over a normal HTTP connection.
Because there is a combination of secure and non-secure data exchanged between the web client and the server,
the web browser will not show the connection as secure in the browser address bar.
The transmitter is configured for secure communications from the Secure Comms Setup page. Once secure
communications mode is enabled, the web client will automatically reload the GUI.

Figure 3-43 Secure Comms Setup


FAX uses a certificate that is not signed by a certificate authority. When the home screen is first accessed from a
browser window, the browser will display the warning screen. (This is the warning screen from the Chrome browser,
but all browser warning screens are similar.) Click on the “Advanced” button and then the “Proceed to x.x.x.x
(unsafe)” link. The screen shown will be displayed while the web client loads the Flexiva certificate. After the
certificate is loaded, the Flexiva home screen is loaded automatically. Once the certificate is loaded in a browser, the
home screen will be directly accessible without having to go through the browser warning screens to load the

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-50 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

certificate as long as the IP address is put in the address bar. Using https://172.20.9.132 will force the certificate to
be reloaded.

Figure 3-44 Unsecure Site Warning

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 3-51
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-45 Unsecure Site Warning - Advanced Options

Figure 3-46 Security Loading

3.12.10 System>System Setup>Network>NTP Menu

Note
For NTP to work a connection to the Internet is required.

Allows for time and date setup in the FAX transmitter via NTP, this is used for accurate time/date in the Event Log
only. The time reference can be changed to UTC (Requires Server address). To change Reference go to the
System>Network>NTP menu.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
3-52 Section-3 Operation
January 18, 2021

Figure 3-47 UTC Time Setup


If using the UTC setting for more accurate time and date, an IP address of a UTC time server must be entered. A list
of time server IP addresses can be obtained from NIST.
NTP - Enabled or Disabled
NTP Server - IP Address of one of the NTP Time servers throughout the world.
Update Interval - Transmitter will update Time via NTP per this setting. Range 2 - 1000 minutes.
UTC OFFSET Hrs - Enter an offset in hours that your location is from Greenwich Mean Time. User must take into
consideration daylight savings time if applicable.
UTC OFFSET Min - Enter an offset in Minutes that your location is from Greenwich Mean Time. User must take into
consideration daylight savings time if applicable.

3.12.11 SYSTEM>System Setup>Network>ISP Menu

Figure 3-48 ISP Screen


The ISP menu is used for uploading software the FAX and also to save a configuration file from the transmitter. This
configuration file contains all of the user settings as well as calibration data. It is a good practice to save a
configuration file when installation of the transmitter is complete as well as when any configuration or calibration
changes have been made. See Section 5 of the manual for uploading software and saving configuration procedures.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-1
January 18, 2021

4 Section-4 Theory

4.1 FAX Transmitter Configurations

The following theory of operation is intended to provide a general overall knowledge of how the FAX high power
series (5 kW through 40 kW) of transmitters work.

The FAX series of transmitters can be operated in any one of three modes, which are:

• The analog FM mode, with the PA modules operated class C mode to maximize efficiency.
• The multiplex mode where analog FM and digital (HD) RF signals are both amplified in the same power ampli-
fiers. For this mode, the PA modules are operated class AB, because digital HD requires linear amplifiers.
• Digital HD mode only. For this mode, the PA modules are operated class AB, because digital HD requires lin-
ear amplifiers.

The 10 kW FAX transmitter is the basic building block for all other high power FAX transmitters. The FAX10 does not
contain an integrated exciter at this time and requires an exciter external to the transmitter chassis. All FAX
transmitters have provisions for dual exciters with internal RF switching. All of the current GatesAir FM exciters can
be used or the FAX is setup to allow another manufacturers exciter to be used.

The 5 kW FAX transmitter has the identical hardware of the FAX10, except there are four less PA Modules and three
less PS Modules. The 5 kW exciter setup and 10kW without IPA is slightly different than the 10 kW with IPA and will
be explained in the 5 kW/10 kW without IPA section.

A 15 kW FAX transmitter consists of a 7.5 kW transmitter and a 7.5kW Power Block combined. The 7.5kW
transmitter is referred to as the primary power block or power block 1 because it contains the front panel LCD
Display and Multi-unit Interface that controls the overall transmitter. The FAX15 is housed in a single cabinet.

A 20 kW FAX transmitter consists of a 10 kW transmitter and a 10kW Power Block combined. The 10kW transmitter
is referred to as the primary power block or power block 1 because it contains the front panel LCD Display and
Multi-unit Interface that controls the overall transmitter. The FAX20 is housed in a single cabinet.

A 30 kW FAX transmitter consists of a 10 kW transmitter and two 10 kW Power Blocks combined. The FAX30 is
housed in two cabinets with a cabinet combiner that combines them.

A 40 kW FAX transmitter consists of a 10 kW transmitter and three 10kW Power Blocks combined. The FAX40 is
housed in 2 cabinets like the FAX30

4.1.1 10kW with IPA RF Block Diagram Description

Figure 4-1 shows the RF block diagram portion of a FAX 10 kW transmitter. It has seven PA modules and one IPA
module that have identical hardware and are interchangeable in the event of failure.

The two main differences between the PA Module slot and the IPA module slot is the IPA uses only one of its FET’s
and the other as a backup IPA. The other difference is the IPA can accept the APC in case the exciter has no external
APC input.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-2 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

FAX PA Modules consists of a pair of RF pallets driven and combined externally. A module control board provides
simple control functions including turning the amplifier on and off, set the mode of operation [class C operation for
FM service, class A/B for digital service] and fault monitoring/reporting.

Referring to Figure 4-1, the output of the RF Switch board feeds a 2-way Wilkinson splitter. The outputs of the 2-way
splitter in turn feed two Wilkinson splitters. This divides the IPA output to feed each of the FETs on PA modules. The
RF output from each of the FETs is then fed to the Wilkinson combiner. The combiner also houses a low pass filter to
remove any harmonics from the amplifiers.

Wilkinson splitters were used to provide better isolation, lower loss and 0 degrees phase shift. This phase becomes
important when we discuss the combining of the power blocks in the FAX15/20/30/40.

The output of the LPF then goes through a 6-port directional coupler to a 1-5/8" EIA Unflanged output on the rear of
the transmitter.The ports on the directional coupler feed the controller RF sample for APC and VSWR detection.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-3
January 18, 2021

There are also ports for modulation monitoring and the RTAC signals for the FAX/Flexstar Exciter Pre-Correction
when the transmitter is running in Class AB mode.

IPA RF Switch Module

Exciter A RF Input
IPA Module
Exciter B RF Input
Exciter Switch
PA Backplane
Relay, on System
Interface Board, IPA RF Output to
PA System 2-Way
PA Module Splitter

PA Module

N-Way
Splitter PA Backplane

PA Module

RF Output
RF Input From IPA through a
High Level RF Switch 2-Way N-Way multi-loop
Splitter Combiner/ Directional
PA Module LPF Coupler

PA Backplane

PA Module

N-Way
Splitter

PA Module

PA Backplane

PA Module

Figure 4-1 FAX 10 kW with IPA Power Block

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-4 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

PA BackPlane IPA RF Level


Rear To Sys Inf
Panel

J4 J12
Exc A RF Switch Bd

J2
A
J5
J4 J3 J4
To 14-Way
Splitter
B J6
J7
J5 J13
Exc B
RF Switch Bd
System Interface IPA
Board Module
IPA RF Level Detected on
RF Switch board, it is DC
Exciter power displayed voltage used for IPA RF
on FAX is a DC Voltage Fault and switching
RF Switch Bd relays switch in
from Exciter. There is
tandem. For FAX20/30/40 All IPA’s
no RF detector for
will be on A or B
Exciter Power
3 dB Pad provides isolation between
Exciters and IPA and helps prevent
overload of IPA

Figure 4-2 FAX10/15/20/30/40 Drive Chain

The block diagram in Figure 4-2 shows the FAX10/15/20/30/40 RF flow from the exciters to the output of the IPA
switch that drives the power block splitter. The dual exciters are shown feeding an exciter selector switch. The
exciter selector switch relay is located on the System Interface Control Module located to the right of the Power
Supply Modules. In a dual Exciter system, the system controller will automatically switch when the on-air exciters RF
power drops below a preset level. This level can be set by the user.

The output of the Exciter switch relay goes to the IPA Switch Board input. The input of the RF Switch board has a 3 dB
pad for isolation between the exciter and the IPA. The IPA switch has 2 relays one on the input to the IPA and one on
the output of the IPA, these switch in tandem. For protection, the transmitter will be muted while switching occurs.

The RF Switch board also contains the IPA RF output level detector. The IPA switches when the detector output drops
below 0.5 VDC.

4.1.2 FAX5, FAX 7.5 and FAX10 without IPA RF Block Diagram

The FAX5/7.5 utilizes the same chassis and hardware as the FAX10. However, they use fewer PA modules and Power
supplies and also have a slightly different RF Chain. In the 10 kW transmitter there are 14 FET’s to achieve 10 kW, so
in a FAX5 seven FET’s are required. In this case there are 3 PA modules and one IPA/PA module.

Up to January 2014 FAX5 RF Chain refer to Figure 4-3.

Refer to Figure 4-3, the exciters now have two different paths and only 1 IPA. The other FET in the IPA slot runs
continuously as a PA. Exciter A is a high power exciter and bypasses the IPA and drives the 7-way splitter directly. This
requires the exciter to output approximately 60 Watts which is the normal IPA power. If Exciter A power out drops
below the preset level (0.5 VDC on the detector) and the transmitter switches, Exciter B then drives the IPA and runs
at approximately 3 Watts. The RF Switch that was used for IPA’s now is the exciter switcher in the FAX5. The Exciter
switch that resides on the System Interface board is not used.

All other circuits in the FAX5/7.5 work identical to the FAX10.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-5
January 18, 2021

RF switch board relays switch in


tandem when Drive Chain
switches to Exciter B

RF Level detector for


Exciter power
exciter switchover
≈50 Watts
Exciter A
J5
J4
RF to 7-Way
J2
Splitter
J6 K1
J3
Exciter B
J7 RF Switch board
Exciter power K2
≈3 Watts IPA power
≈50 Watts
RF Switch board IPA is part of PA Module 1
upper left slot in amplifier
cabinet

Figure 4-3 FAX5 Drive Chain (Prior to January 2014)

Figure 4-4 FAX5 and FAX10 without IPA Drive Chain (January 2014 and later)
For FAX5 and FAX10 without IPA manufactured January 2014 and later refer to Figure 4-4.
To keep the exciter power the same in both paths, exciter B is now routed directly to the RF Switch board and
bypasses the IPA. The FET in PA Module 1, upper left module, is no longer used. In case of failure of the A FET in any
other module, that module can be replaced by module 1. The both exciters will now run in the 50 to 60 Watt range
for 5 kW output depending on frequency of the transmitter. K1 will switch when the RF level drops below 40 %.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-6 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

4.1.3 FAX 15 /FAX20 RF Block Diagram

The FAX15 contains two 7.5 kW power blocks in one cabinet while the FAX20 contains two 10 kW power blocks in
one cabinet. One power block contains the Micro Module controller, the other power block has only a LED Status
board. Figure 4-5 is a block diagram of the RF of the FAX20.
3 dB Hybrid combiner
requires 90° Phase to
combine at the RF Output

-3 dB @ -90° 10 kW -90°
PB1 15/20 kW

Exciter ‫׫‬
÷
Drive
10 kW 0°
PB2 Reject load
-3 dB @0°
sized to ½
power of 1
6 kW
power block
Splitter on Multi-Unit RJ
LD To calibrate
Interface Panel
shut off 1
3 dB Hybrid type
0° Phase shift through power block
power blocks, all splitters for 100 %
and combiners are
Wilkinson type
Figure 4-5 FAX 15 / FAX 20 RF Block Diagram

The output of the Exciter switcher drives a 2-way splitter. This splitter is a 3 dB Hybrid type and one output port has
a 90° phase shift. The power blocks each have a 0° phase shift which allows for the correct phasing at the power
block combiner. The 6 kW power block combiner reject load is sized to accept half the total RF in the case where
one power block is off.

4.1.4 FAX30 RF Block Diagram

The FAX30 contains three 10 kW power blocks in 2 cabinets. One power block contains the Micro Module controller,
the other power blocks have only a LED Status board. Figure 4-6 is a block diagram of the RF of the FAX30.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-7
January 18, 2021

Figure 4-6 FAX30 RF Block Diagram

The output of the Exciter switcher drives a 2-way splitter. This splitter is a 4.77 dB Hybrid type and one output port
has a 90° phase shift. In cabinet 1 (-1.76 dB/0° port) drives a second 3 dB hybrid. The output provides the correct
phase shift to combine the 2 power blocks in cabinet 1 and the RF signal now has a -90° phase shift compared to the
input signal. To get this signal to combine with cabinet 2 an additional phase shift of -90° is required in cabinet 2 so
that the inputs to the 4.77 dB cabinet combiner are -90° from each other.

The system now requires 2 reject loads, a 6 kW power block combiner reject load and a 12 kW cabinet combiner
reject load. The cabinet combiner load is sized to accept half the total RF in the case where one cabinet is off.

4.1.5 FAX40 RF Block Diagram

The FAX40 contains four 10 kW power blocks in 2 cabinets. One power block contains the Micro Module controller,
the other power blocks have only a LED Status board. Figure 4-7 is a block diagram of the RF of the FAX40.

The FAX40 is basically two FAX20’s combined. There is an extra 2-way splitter on the input and a 3 dB Hybrid
combiner on the output with the associated reject load.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-8 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

3 dB

-6 dB 0° 10 kW 0° 20 kW -90°
3 dB PB1
-3 dB 0°
÷ ‫׫‬

10 kW -90° 3 dB
PB2
-6 dB -90°
3 dB 40 kW
6 kW
RJ
Exciter LD
÷ ‫׫‬
Drive
3 dB

-6 dB -90° 10 kW -90°
3 dB PB1
20 kW -180° 12 kW
RJ
-3 dB -90° LD
÷ ‫׫‬

10 kW -180° Reject load


PB2 sized to 1
-6 dB -180°
cabinet
6 kW
RJ
LD
All splitters and combiners external to
the power blocks are Hybrid type

Figure 4-7 FAX40 RF Block Diagram

4.1.6 System APC

The FAX APC (Automatic Power Control) operates in two modes, Exciter or IPA. With the exception of the Micromax,
all GatesAir exciters will have an external APC input. In this case the APC would feed the exciter. If the exciter does
not haven external APC input that is able to accept the level from the FAX transmitter then the APC would feed the
IPA inside the transmitter. The APC from the FAX10/15/20/30/40 is in the range of 0 to 3.5 VDC, 0 V being 0 watts out
of the exciter. For a FAX5 the APC is 0 to 4.75 VDC.

Figure 4-7 shows a simplified block diagram of the FAX APC which is located on the System Interface/Multi-Unit
Interface board depending on the FAX model. The Power Control Reference is actually derived from the Micro and
Control and Display board. This reference shown on the block diagram as pwr_ctrl_ref, is set during the calibration
process at 3.5 VDC at the calibrated power. The pwr_ctrl_ref voltage stays constant, the only thing that changes this
in Normal control mode is the user raising or lowering power.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-9
January 18, 2021

Figure 4-8 APC Simplified Block Diagram

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-10 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

In the event of a failure and the transmitter goes to Backup control, the Backup Control Ref pot would become the
power reference. The raise/lower power buttons will not function, however the APC still functions and the power
can be adjusted using the pot.

The APC is affected by several control lines in the system, forward power, reflected power foldback, forward power
limit and mute. When the forward power changes the APC changes in the opposite direction, ie if forward power
increases the APC voltage decreases thus lowering the exciter power which in turn lowers the transmitter power
back to its setting.

If the transmitter has an elevated reflected power that is above a user set threshold of 1.3 to 1.5:1, the voltage on
the VSWR Foldback line increases, this causes APC to lower the exciter power. If the forward power limit, which 10%
above calibrated power is hit, the Forward Power Limit voltage is increased which decreases the exciter power. If the
instantaneous reflected power exceeds 1.5:1, the VSWR Fault circuit will send a Fault OFF the controller as well as a
Mute to the APC. The controller will make three attempts to bring the transmitter back to power. After the third
attempt the transmitter will stay off and will require user intervention to turn it back on. In Backup control the
three-strike is no longer available and the transmitter will remain OFF in the event of a VSWR fault.

The APC is shown driving the exciter, if a product such as the GatesAir Micromax is used, the APC switch to the
exciter is opened and the APC switch to the IPA is closed. The APC still functions the same but the extra Op-Amp sets
the correct level for the FAX IPA input.

4.1.7 PA Module Description

Each PA Module contains 2 RF Power Amplifiers referred to as "A" and "B." A FAX 10 kW Transmitter and Power
Block uses 8 of these modules. One of the eight modules is used as an IPA module.

Figure 4-9 PA Module

Figure 4-9 above right side shows the PA Module with the cover off. There are 2 PWAs. On the left is the PA pallet
which contains amplifiers A and B. On the right is an additional circuit card that contains the module control logic
and interface functions.

The PA circuit board is mounted on a thick solid copper substrate. The RF Power transistors are soldered down
directly to the copper substrate. Copper is used because it is the best conductor of heat and will dissipate the heat
away from the RF power transistors quickly and evenly. The copper substrate then mounts to the aluminum heatsink
assembly to dissipate the heat away from the copper. There is a thin film between the copper spreader and the
aluminum heatsink for optimum heat transfer.

The RF signal is amplified in the PA modules by specially designed LDMOS Power FETs with a nominal gain of 14 – 22
dB, depending on frequency and operating mode. Both sides are identical so only one path will be described. RF
drive power enters Amplifier via J1. RF passes through a forward power coupler for overdrive detection, then to an
input matching network to the FET Q1. The FET operates in push-pull to produce approximately 800W FM power
into a 50 ohm load. Their low impedance outputs are transformed via the output network to 50 ohms and passed to
a reflected power coupler for VSWR protection. RF Output exits the board via edge connector pins on J1.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-11
January 18, 2021

To make the module safe to hot plug it the traces for the RF output, RF input and +VDD are a different length, See
Figure 4-10. The RF output traces are longest so when inserting a module the load is the first to be connected. When
removing a module the load will be the last to be disconnected. Next in length is the +VDD and finally the last to be
connected inserting and the first to be disconnected removing a module is the RF input drive.
RF Output RF Input
+VDD

Figure 4-10 PA Module Edge Connector

The +VDD PA voltage has a range from +44 VDC to +52 VDC. The actual voltage varies depending on which mode the
transmitter is in: FM only, FM + HD, or HD only mode. The reason to have different voltages for different modes is to
maximize transmitter PA efficiency and spectrum performance.

The gate bias circuit performs 3 functions: PA ON/OFF, Class C Bias for FM Mode of operation, and Class AB Bias for
HD Modes. A control voltage of -5V at J2-4 turns Q5 off which allows the RF Amplifier to operate. The Bias Mode
voltage alters the PA bias voltage to cause the PA amplifier to operate at Class AB or Class C. The control voltages
come from the module Control board.

Thermistors RT1 and RT2 are used to stabilize the bias as the temperature of the module varies. Pots R102 and R103
are set at the factory to precisely set the Class AB bias. Pots R101 and R104 are adjusted for Class C operation. These
pots should not be adjusted. Thermistor RT3 monitors the heatsink temperature. If the heatsink temperature gets
too high (90° - 100°C), the Module Control board will shut off the full PA Module.

4.1.8 Power Supply System Description

The Power Supply Interface Board performs several functions as follows:

• Interfaces power supplies DC output with the PA modules


• Busses dc from supplies for IPA and fans
• Monitors AC line for under voltage
• Monitors airflow and exhaust air temperature
• Provides distribution of the +5 VDC to the rest of the system

Figure 4-11 Power Supply Interface Board

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-12 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

The AC Mains connect to the board which feeds the AC into each power supply module. The power supplies are
single phase input and operate from 190 to 300 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. The AC service connected to the FAX must have a
Line to Line voltage or Line to Neutral voltage that falls within this range. The AC service into the transmitter or AC
distribution panel in the rack can be single phase, 3-Phase Delta or 3-Phase Wye. There is an AC Mains Monitor
circuit that monitors for low voltage only. The approximate trip point is just below 190 VAC which produces a fault
but no action is taken, the transmitter will stay on the air. The transmitter will continue operate when 1 or 2 phases
are lost but at a much reduced power. In the power block the supplies are distributed across the phases.

Control signal PA ON/OFF from the System Interface Controller, named PS_ON on PS Interface board, feed each
power supply to turn its DC output ON or OFF. The DC output can be in the range from +44 VDC to +52 VDC to
accommodate different modes of transmitter operation. There is a +VDC output from each of the 7 supplies to feed
7 PA Modules. Each PA has a dedicated Power Supply Module. If a Power Supply Module fails, the associated PA
Module will shut off. This configuration allows for multiple failures while the remaining supplies keep the
transmitter on the air at a reduced power level. The +VDC for the IPA comes from a diode controlled sharing circuit
that connects to each of the PS +VDC lines. Because of the power supply module sharing, multiple supply failures
will not affect the IPA +VDC. The IPA has an in-line fuse F10 (15 Amp) on board. In the Normal Control mode the
Main supply output DC is controlled from the micro controller to the PS Margin Pin. In Backup control or
Lifesupport, and the transmitter is switched between Class C and Class A/B modes, the System Interface Power
Supply Control circuit sets the PS CTRL (TP18) voltage that drives the Margin pin on the power supply. This is ≈0.6
VDC for Class C and ≈ 1.1 for Class A/B and corresponds to about a 2 Volt increase when switching from Class C to
Class A/B+VDC.

There is an auxiliary +5 VDC output from each supply. This supply is the main 5 Volts that feeds the control circuitry.
There are no other power supplies in the system. Any other voltages on any of the boards in the transmitter are
regulated from the 5 Volts. In the case of FAX models with multiple power blocks, the +5 VDC from each is diode
gated back to the main power block. If the AC fails to the main power block which houses the Multi-Unit controller
the transmitter will remain on the air using 5 Volts control voltage from the other power blocks.

The Airflow is measured by comparing two LM50B temperature sensors, one a heated reference sensor the other in
direct path of airflow. When the airflow in the transmitter drops the sensor in the airflow path will increase in
temperature and its output will trip U2-7 causing the transmitter to shut off. Once airflow returns the transmitter
will automatically turn back on.

Dipswitch S1 serves 2 functions, sections 1 and 2 are used to set the AIRFLOW fault trip level. Switches 4, 5, 6, and 7
are used to disable Power Supply Modules 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the FAX 5 transmitter as it only uses 4 Power Supply
Modules. In the 10kW Power Blocks, the are set in the OPEN (OFF) position.

Power for the Fans also is provided by the Power Supply Module’s sharing circuit. The shared PA Volts feed fuse F9
(15 Amp) then to the Fan Control Board.

4.1.9 Fan Control Board Description

The Figure 4-12 shows the Fan Monitor board. The Fan Control board monitors each fans tach, controls the speed of
the fans and also has a RF power detector when used on a reject load.

The cooling fans in the system are variable speed and run at a reduced speed under normal operating conditions.
When certain faults occur, such as a PA fault, the controller ramps all fans in the system to full speed. This would
include the reject load in the FAX15/20/30/40 transmitters.

If a fans tach drops below a preset hardware limit, the board reports a fault back to the FAX main controller. The
fault also lights a corresponding LED that can be seen on board at the rear door of the transmitter.

The RF detector and temperature sensor are used when the board is mounted on a reject load. The RF sample from
the reject load is detected and a DC voltage sent back to the controller. This sample is calibrated to 100% when an
entire power block is off or an entire cabinet depending on the system. The temperature sample detects the reject
load temp and is sent back to the controller. If either temp or RF exceed a preset limit, a reject load fault is generated
and the transmitter will increase fan speed to 100% and reduce the transmitter power to 25% to protect itself.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-13
January 18, 2021

Figure 4-12 Fan Control Board

4.1.10 Front Panel Control/Display Board Description

The Control and Display board performs the following functions in the FAX transmitter:

• Interface to the Micro Module


• Interface to the Front Panel User Interface
• Contains Ethernet Ports
• Has Backup Hardware control
• Generates the APC Reference in Normal Control Mode
• Stores Configuration in memory

The Control & Display Module consists of a control/display board and micromodule. The control/display board has
the simple hardware control circuits to take care of primary functions such as ON/OFF, Module restrike, Remote
enable, Drive chain select and Power reference generation. All hardware on the board is associated with interfacing
to the micromodule for enhanced control operation. The micromodule board attaches to the Control/display board
and provides the key microprocessor control functions as well as the Web interface. It also provides the user
interface to the LCD and front panel buttons and status indicators.

The FAX transmitter has three control modes of operation, Normal, Basic hardware control and Life support control.

Normal Mode: In this mode of operation, the transmitter has full functionality with the primary control functions
being done in Hardware (HW) but the hardware can be controlled by the microprocessor. The key states such as ON/
OFF, Remote ENABLE/DISABLE, etc are stored in non volatile hardware ICs that will remember the last state even if
there is not microprocessor control and a loss of AC power. Web interface is fully functional and the microprocessor
can perform more advanced control of the transmitter to optimize operation and performance.

HW Control- In this mode the micro is assumed to be disabled or failed. It is disconnected from the Hardware
control system so undefined states of operation do not disrupt basic operation. At this point additional hardware
required for transmitter operation is enabled on the System interface board. The transmitter has all required
functionality for parallel remote control and protection. Some automatic modes of operation like Auto exciter and
IPA switching are not available.

Lifesupport Control- In this mode the entire Control and Display board can be non operational and the transmitter
will still be able to be operated via life support hardware on the System Interface board. The System interface
hardware used in the HW control mode is still active. The primary loss of functionality compared to the HW control
mode is that there is no front panel control of Remote mode and power Raise lower. Transmitter ON/OFF
functionality is still available from parallel Remote control

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-14 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

The transmitter configuration is stored in memory on this board. This configuration contains the user setup, ie dual
exciter, frequency,exciter type, etc, as well as all calibrations. This file is a downloadable file that can be stored on a
computer and uploaded in the event the Control and Display board needs to be replaced. It is a good idea to store
this when the transmitter is first installed and any time a change to setup or calibration is completed.

The board also provides the power control reference to the System Interface board APC hardware. This reference is
3.5 VDC and remains constant under normal conditions. If the raise or lower power button is pressed this voltage
changes, lower power will lower the reference voltage. See APC and System Interface for further details.

Figure 4-13 Control and Display Board

4.1.11 System Interface Control Board Description

The FAX5/7.5/10kW transmitter contains a System Interface control Module that mounts directly to the right of the
Power Supply Modules. This board provides several functions for the transmitter system.

• Operates as a transmitter interface or a power block interface (FAX15/20/30/40)


• Hardware control in lifesupport mode
• Exciter interface and exciter RF switching
• The APC hardware is located on board
• OptoCouplers for Remote control via Parallel I/O
• Forward and reflected power detection and metering samples
• Hardware for VSWR protection and power limit functions
• System status LED’s
• Multiplexing bus for meter readings

The exciter interface can be setup to accept any exciter, GatesAir or another manufacturer. If a non-GatesAir exciter
is used the dipswitch settings will need to be properly set and a custom interface cable made. If dual exciters are
used the RF switching is done on board. To achieve automatic switching a DC voltage proportional to RF power must
come from the exciter, this voltage is monitored and when a user set limit is reached the exciter automatically
switches.

If using one of the iboc modes there are status lines that come from the exciter to tell the controller if the
transmitter should be in class C or class AB. When the exciter switches to one of the three modes, FM, FM+HD or HD
Only, the controller sets the proper power supply voltage, sets the PA modules to the correct class of operation and
loads the calibration points for forward and reflected power in the system and power blocks (FAX15/20/30/40). Keep
in mind if using multiple modes of operation that each mode requires calibration.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 4-15
January 18, 2021

The transmitter sends a mute, APC and Exciter active line back to the on-air exciter. The mute line can be set to
active hi or low depending on dipswitch settings. The APC voltage is on the range of 0 to 4 VDC, if using a non-
GatesAir exciter the exciter input must be compatible. See the APC description in Section 4.1.6, System APC

Remote control functions are located on board. The User Interface J1 on the rear panel interfaces to the opto-
couplers. This is the only remote control available in backup mode. RF Mute and TX OFF inputs can be defeated by
setting dipswitches. There are also four programmable Status outputs that are user definable, a computer must
connected via Ethernet to set this up.

There are two interlocks available External and Equipment. The External Interlock must be closed or the transmitter
will not operate. If the External Interlock is opened during operation the transmitter shuts down and requires a TX
ON command to resume. Equipment Interlock when pulled low will shut the transmitter off, when switched hi the
transmitter will resume normal operation.

There are remote analog voltage outputs for System Forward Power, System Reflected Power, PA Voltage and Total
PA Current (DC).

The forward and reflected power detectors are identical circuits. These are fed from the same port on the System
directional coupler. Using the same port and having identical detectors and control of the gain in the detector path
allows for automatic calibration of reflected power without adding a mismatch or swapping cables on the coupler.

When calibrating the system power the the user inputs the TPO to calibrate to and the AGC is turned off, this allows
the power to be adjusted without fighting the power control. The gain through the detector path is set to minimum
at this point. Phase 1 is complete. Next step is to set the exciter RF power so the transmitter forward power as read
on a external meter is same as the user TPO entered. When the calibration routine is started the controller will set
the gain to get 3.5 VDC for a forward power sample. THe controller then turn calibrate to ON (Same as setting S2-8
to ON) and this puts a 2 VDC reference on each gain stage input. The micro reads the voltage at the output of the
forward power stage, then adjusts the reflected stage gain until it matches the forward stage voltage output.
Calibration is turned off and the TPO is set to equal the 3.5 VDC. Reflected is then calculated based on the 3.5 VDC
being 1.5:1 relative to the TPO set.

VSWR Fault and foldback as well as Forward Power limit are implemented in hardware. The Forward Power limit is
set to 10% above the TPO calibrated. This is done off the 3.5 VDC reference that was established during the
calibration routine. The 3.5 VDC from the forward power detector stage is sent to a comparator circuit, when the
forward power exceeds 110% of TPO the comparator output increases. The forward power limit is fed to the APC
which limits the it from increasing system power.

VSWR has two thresholds, foldback and fault. The foldback threshold is user settable in the GUI in the range of 1.3
to 1.5:1. Based on the 3.5 VDC sample that is equal to 1.5:1 relative to the TPO calibrated, the hardware setpoint is
1.3:1 for foldback. If the user sets this to a higher value the micro increases the comparator reference voltage to set
the trip point higher. In backup control mode this defaults back to 1.3:1. The VSWR Fault is set to 1.5:1 in hardware.
When the VSWR exceeds 1.5:1 a resettable latch is set which sends a System Fault OFF command to the micro. The
micro will shut the transmitter off and attempt to bring the transmitter back on, or Restrike. The micro module will
attempt to restrike the transmitter three times before is stays off. The advance 3-strike is only available in Normal
Control mode.

The faults, powers, voltages and currents are all multiplexed back to the micro module. The control and switching
circuitry are located on the System Interface board. In the case of multiple power blocks and cabinets these lines
would be sent to the Multi-Unit Interface board.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
4-16 Section-4 Theory
January 18, 2021

Figure 4-14 System Interface Control Board

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-1
January 18, 2021

5 Section-5 Maintenance

5.1 Introduction

This section provides maintenance, calibration and board replacement procedures for qualified technical personnel.
This section assumes that the Engineer performing the maintenance has a working knowledge of the transmitter
and Section 3 of this manual in particular.

Routine maintenance of the FAX series transmitter consists of regular cleaning and the monitoring of power, VSWR,
voltages, and current readings to detect any deviations that might indicate a developing problem.To maximize
equipment reliability and longevity, it is important to develop and stick to a well designed maintenance routine.

A transmitter’s performance and longevity will be maximized if it is properly maintained by a well-trained,


technically skilled individual. To this end, GatesAir offers a variety of training classes specific to Flexiva FAX series
transmitters. Contact your GatesAir representative or visit the GatesAir website at www.gatesair.com for more
information on training offerings.

5.1.1 Safety Precautions

The amplifier chassis is composed of two general zones: the front half, as accessed by the front door and the rear
half, as accessed by the rear door.

The front door is hinged and can be opened while the transmitter is running for access to the PA, IPA, and PS
modules. The PA, IPA, and PS modules may be replaced while the transmitter is operating.

The rear door requires a tool to gain access and should never be opened while the transmitter is operating. It is very
dangerous to attempt to make measurements or to replace components in the rear chamber with the mains power
applied. If door is opened while transmitter is operating, the transmitter will trip the airflow sensor and shut the
transmitter down until it is closed. Shut off all power before servicing the transmitter, other than replacement of PA,
IPA, and PS modules.

Warning
NEVER PERFORM TRANSMITTER MAINTENANCE WHILE ALONE AND/OR NOT FULLY
ALERT. SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT FROM FAILURE TO
OBSERVE PROPER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.

5.2 Dipswitch Settings

See the below tables for various switch settings for each printed circuit board in the transmitter. Care should be
taken when replacing boards as revision levels change and this may effect the switch settings. If setting does not
state "USER" then the switch should not be changed from its factory default unless Factory Service is consulted. If
Setting column states "Model" the switch setting is model dependent.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-2 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

Table 5-1 Control & Display Board Switch S15

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S15-1 SW Control 7 OFF Disables all Software Control of Hardware
Disable
S15-2 FP Enable 5 ON/User Disables front panel ON/OFF and Raise/Lower Buttons when
Remote is Enabled
S15-3 Remote 6 ON/User Sets Remote Enable LED to Green
Enable LED
S15-4 Remote 6 OFF/User Sets Remote Enable LED to Red
Enable LED
S15-5 SW APC 4 OFF Enables Software control of APC (Future)
Enable
S15-6 N/A N/A N/A NOT USED
S15-7 RS485 15 OFF Terminates RS485 Bus
TERM
S15-8 CAN TERM 15 OFF Terminates CAN Bus

Table 5-2 System Interface Board S2 (Rev H hardware and later)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S2-1 APC Volt 5 OFF OFF - has a lower APC limit voltage; ON - Bypasses diodes to allow
Limit APC voltage to limit higher, ≈4.75 VDC; ON when higher APC Voltage
is required, ie FAX5 with Flexstar driving the high level input
S2-2 Remote TX 10 OFF/USER ON enables transmitter Remote TX OFF even when Remote is
OFF Enable Disabled on front panel
S2-3 RF Mute 3 Model ON-When Board is TX or System Controller; OFF- When board is
Defeat Power Block Controller
S2-4 LS Remote 4 ON/USER ON - Allows User to Enable User Remote J1 in Lifesupport Mode;
Enable OFF User Remote is disabled in Lifesupport mode
S2-5 EXT Mute 10 OFF/USER Allows User to Defeat External RF Mute J1-7;ON=Disabled
Defeat
S2-6 APC Fault 6 ON ON=APC Disabled with PA or PS Summary Fault
OFF
S2-7 APC OFF 6 OFF OFF=APC Enabled; ON=APC Disabled
S2-8 PWR CAL 6 OFF Used in Power Block Calibration Routine ONLY

Note
The functionality of S2-1 of System Interface Board 901-0234-051 changed on Hardware Revision H. For
Revision G and earlier use Table 5-3. All other switches functionality remained the same. This switch
should be set according to the voltage range required by the APC input of the exciter in use.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-3
January 18, 2021

Table 5-3 System Interface Board S2 (Rev G hardware and earlier)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S2-1 APC 4 ON ON - for hardware control of APC; OFF for software control of APC;
Hardware Software control of APC not implemented at this time. If switch is set to
Control OFF the APC will not function.

Table 5-4 System Interface Board S3

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S3-1 MUX Unit 1 12 Model For FAX5/10,and Power Block 1 in FAX15/20/30/40 ON; All others OFF
S3-2 MUX Unit 2 12 Model ON=Power Block 2 FAX15/20/30/40; All other OFF
S3-3 MUX Unit 3 12 Model ON=Power Block 3 FAX30/40; All other OFF
S3-4 MUX Unit 4 12 Model ON=Power Block 4 FAX40; All other OFF
S3-5 System 12 Model ON= System Controller; OFF=Power Block Controller/TX
Control
S3-6 Config 4 Model ON=Power Block Controller; OFF=TX/System Controller
S3-7 Default 5 OFF Used on TX/System controller only; ON=TX primary mode defaults
Mode to either HD mode
S3-8 Default 5 ON Used on TX/System controller only; ON=TX primary mode defaults
Mode to FM

Table 5-5 System Interface Board S5 (Exciter A) and S6 (Exciter B)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S5-1 RS485 8 Model Used for FAX Exciter. Allows serial communication between Fax
Enable transmitter and Fax exciter.
S5-2 FM_ON 8 Model Used when Exciter has FM ON Status outputs
Status
S5-3 HD_ON 8 Model Used when Exciter has HD ON Status outputs
Status
S5-4 Exciter 8 Model ON-When Exciter has a Ready Status Line
Ready
S5-5 RF Mute 8 Model ON=Mute to Exciter Low;OFF=Mute to Exciter Hi
Polarity
S5-6 RF Mute 8 Model ON=Mute to Exciter Hi;OFF=Mute to Exciter Low
Polarity
S5-7 APC Out 8 Model ON=Exciter has External APC Input; OFF requires the APC to drive
the IPA and S5-8 (S6-8) should must be ON.
S5-8 Drive 8 Model ON=IPA Drive Control (Exciter has no External APC
Control input):OFF=Exciter APC Control

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-4 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

Note
S5 is used for Exciter A and S6 for Exciter B and have same definitions. If exciter A and B are different
models ensure the switch settings are correct for proper operation of transmitter.

Table 5-6 GatesAir Exciters Setup Table S5 & S6 System Interface

Position FAX FLEXSTAR DIGIT/IPA MICROMAX Other Ext APC


S5 or S6 Control
1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
5 See Note ON ON OFF ON
Below
OFF
6 See Note OFF OFF ON OFF
Below
ON
7 ON ON OFF OFF ON
8 OFF OFF ON ON OFF

Note
For FAX Compact Class exciters with Software version prior to A54 S5 and/or S6 switch position 5 should
be on and position 6 should be off.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-5
January 18, 2021

Table 5-7 System Interface S14

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S14-1 Class C 5 N/A Should always be in the ON position
S14-2 Class A/B 5 N/A Should always be in the ON position
S14-3 * Equip Intlk 10 OFF S14-3 OFF, S14-4 ON: Eq. Interlock J1-9 Active Low (Mutes system).
S14-4 * Equip Intlk 10 ON S14-3ON, S14-4 OFF: Eq. Interlock J1-9 Active (High or floating)
(Mutes system).
* For FAX/FLX 20K, 30K, 40K power blocks: S14-3, S14-4 are both set OFF.

Table 5-8 Power Supply Interface Board S1

For FAX high-power with 9010234061G *PWA, PS INTERFACE, 7PS:


Switch Name Default Default Description
FAX10K, FAX20K, FAX5K
FAX30K, FAX40K 4 Power Supplies
7 Power Supplies
S1-1 Air Fault OFF OFF Sets Airflow Fault Trip Point, default 3.1 V; See Note 1
Level
S1-2 Air Fault ON ON Sets Airflow Fault Trip Point 3.1 V; See Note 1
Level
S1-3 PS 3 OFF ON Disables PS3 Fault in FAX5 Only
Disable
S1-4 PS 4 OFF OFF Disables PS4 Fault
Disable
S1-5 PS 5 OFF ON Disables PS5 Fault in FAX5 Only
Disable
S1-6 PS 6 OFF OFF Disables PS6 Fault
Disable
S1-7 PS 7 OFF ON Disables PS7 Fault in FAX5 Only
Disable
S1-8 N/A N/A N/A Not Used

For FAX high-power with 9010234561 PWA, 5 PS INTERFACE:

Switch Name Default Description


FAX7.5K, FAX10KXP
5 Power Supplies
S1-1 Air Fault Level OFF Sets Airflow Fault Trip Point, default 3.1 V; See Note 1
S1-2 Air Fault Level ON Sets Airflow Fault Trip Point 3.1 V; See Note 1
S1-3 Future OFF For future use
S1-4 Future ON For future use
S1-5 Future OFF For future use
S1-6 Future OFF For future use
S1-7 Future OFF For future use
S1-8 Future ON For future use

Note 1 - Only change the airflow trip point when instructed to do so by GatesAir Service Engineer.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-6 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

Table 5-9 Fan Control Board Switch S1 (Power Block Backdoor)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S1-1 Fan 4 2 ON ON - When 4 fans are used: OFF-for 6 kW Reject Load(only2 fans)
Enable
S1-2 Fan 3 2 ON OFF-for FAX5 and 6 kW Reject Load
Enable
S1-3 Speed 1 3 ON ON=Lo Gain (Low Speed)
S1-4 Speed 2 3 OFF ON=Mid Gain (Mid Speed)
S1-5 Speed 3 3 OFF ON=Hi Gain (Hi Speed)
S1-6 FULL OFF 3 OFF Must be set to OFF on Power Block
S1-7 RF 1 4 OFF Sets Gain of RF Detector for Reject Load use only
S1-8 RF 2 4 OFF Sets Gain of RF Detector for Reject Load use only

Note
When replacing a fan board on the reject load calibration is required. See Calibration Procedures in this
section of the manual.

Table 5-10 Fan Control Board Switch S1 (Reject loads)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S1-1 Fan 4 2 ON ON - When 4 fans are used: OFF-for 6 kW Reject Load(only2 fans)
Enable
S1-2 Fan 3 2 ON OFF-for FAX5 and 6 kW Reject Load
Enable
S1-3 Speed 1 3 ON ON=Lo Gain (Low Speed)
S1-4 Speed 2 3 OFF ON=Mid Gain (Mid Speed)
S1-5 Speed 3 3 OFF ON=Hi Gain (Hi Speed)
S1-6 FULL OFF 3 ON Sets the fans to run at slow speed under normal operating temps
(Minimal reject load power)
S1-7 RF 1 4 ON Sets Gain of RF Detector for Reject Load use only; See Note 1
S1-8 RF 2 4 OFF Sets Gain of RF Detector for Reject Load use only; See Note 1

Note 1 - S1-7,8 set the RF detector gain. These switch settings vary for each reject load. See reject load calibration
procedure in Section 5 of this manual.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-7
January 18, 2021

Table 5-11 Cabinet Interface Board S1 (FAX15/20/30/40 Only)

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S1-1 N/A N/A N/A Not Used
S1-2 N/A N/A N/A Not Used
S1-3 N/A N/A N/A Not Used
S1-4 N/A N/A N/A Not Used
S1-5 Pri Rej Load 3 ON=Disables the Primary reject load (12 kW)
Dis
S1-6 Sec Rej 3 ON=Disables the Secondary reject load (6 kW)
Load Dis
S1-7 N/A N/A N/A Not Used
S1-8 N/A N/A N/A Not Used

Table 5-12 PA Backplane Board Switch S1

Switch Name Schematic Default/ Description


Sheet User
Setting
S1-1 MUX Row 1 2 Row ON for Backplane 1; all others OFF
Dependent
S1-2 MUX Row 2 2 Row ON for Backplane 2; all others OFF
Dependent
S1-3 MUX Row 3 2 Row ON for Backplane 3; all others OFF
Dependent
S1-4 MUX Row 4 2 Row ON for Backplane 4; all others OFF
Dependent
S1-5 Analog Bias 2 OFF/User ON Enables the APC voltage to control the IPA; OFF disables APC
Control voltage to IPA (Exciter Control)
S1-6 IPA Current 2 OFF Sets the Overcurrent trip point of the IPA. Always OFF.
Reference
S1-7 IPA Fault 2 Slot ON for Backplane 1 (OFF for transmitters without IPA), OFF for
Dependent Backplane 2 -4(PA Slots),
S1-8 PA Fault 2 Slot OFF for Backplane 1 (ON for backplane 1 for 5K without IPA); ON for
Dependent Backplane 2-4

Note - Backplane 1 is at the top (Row with IPA) and Backplane 4 is bottom row.
When switching with board installed in transmitter, OFF - switch to the left; ON - switch to the right; switch
section 1 is on top and section 8 on bottom

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-8 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

Table 5-13 RF Switch Board S1

Switch Name Schematic Default/User Description


Sheet Setting
S1-1 NC 1 N/A Not Used
S1-2 400 W 1 OFF Future
S1-3 250 W 1 OFF Future
S1-4 200 W 1 See ON for FAX units with an IPA, used for calibration of IPA and Fault
description threshold
S1-5 100 W 1 See ON for 7.5 kW and 10Kw XP (w/o IPA)
description
S1-6 60 W 1 OFF Future
S1-7 40 W 1 See ON for 5Kw
description
S1-8 15 W 1 OFF Future

5.3 Transmitter Cleaning

Table 5-14 Suggested Maintenance Routine

Periodicity Task

Weekly Review readings and compare with baseline readings and/or factory test data
report to detect any deviations.

Monthly to semi-annually Inspect / replace air internal filter(s) (see procedure)


Inspect / clean PA module heatsink fins (see procedure)

Annually Periodic inspection and cleaning (see procedure)


Verify power meter calibrations (see procedure)
Verify reserve exciter and IPA switchover functionality
Verify external interlocks (station load temp sensor, patch panel position switch,
coax switch interlock, etc.)

5.3.1 Air Filter Replacement Procedure

The front door air filter requires periodic replacement. How often depends on the air quality at the site. When the
filter is filled with dust/dirt, it will reduce the air flow to the point where the modules will overheat, then shut down.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-9
January 18, 2021

Warning
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE INSTALL A WET OR MOIST FILTER IN THE
TRANSMITTER. CONTACT GATESAIR SERVICE TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL FILTER
MEDIA, AS NECESSARY.

STEP 1 Open front door by loosening thumbscrews on reverse side of front door.
STEP 2 On the inside of the door, remove the metal frame holding the filter in Remove filter
media from filter retainer frame. With a clean cloth wipe excess dirt from the door frame
where media was.
STEP 3 Install replacement media in retainer frame and screw the metal frame back on.
STEP 4 Close the front door and tighten thumbscrews.
STEP 5 Gently wash the dirty filter media in lukewarm water with a mild soap detergent until all
dust and debris is removed. Rinse thoroughly to remove all soap.
STEP 6 Allow filter media to dry and save for use as replacement media next time procedure is
performed.

5.3.2 PA Module Cleaning Procedure

The PA and IPA module heatsinks do not have large openings for airflow. As a result, it is common for the heatsinks
to collect dirt over time especially if the air filters have not been maintained properly. The modules should be
cleaned with compressed air on a schedule to be determined on site, depending on the air system, filtering,
humidity etc. At least once a year is highly recommended.

Warning
THE PA MODULES ARE DESIGNED TO HANDLE VERY HIGH TEMPERATURES AND MAY
BE EXTREMELY HOT. DO NOT TOUCH THE MODULE SIDES WITH BARE HANDS AFTER
THE TRANSMITTER HAS BEEN RUNNING, ESPECIALLY IN HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERA-
TURE ENVIRONMENTS.

STEP 1 Remove PA module from transmitter.

Caution
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE PA MODULES WITH COMPRESSED AIR
WHILE THEY ARE STILL INSTALLED IN THE TRANSMITTER. THIS WILL
FORCE DUST DEEPER INTO THE TRANSMITTER.

STEP 2 Blow compressed air into heatsink fins to remove dust buildup. If compressed air is not
available, use a vacuum cleaner to suction dust from heatsink.
STEP 3 Use a dry longhair paintbrush to dislodge stubborn dust.

Note
If dirt has built up in the heatsink fins where a paint brush can’t reach, take a piece of cotton cloth and
wedge down between the fins by pulling tight on each end of the cloth. Slide cloth back and forth to
remove dust and dirt. Remove and shake dirt from cloth and repeat in each slot.

STEP 4 Replace PA module in transmitter and repeat for each module.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-10 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

Warning
REMOVING IPA WHILE TRANSMITTER IS OPERATING WILL CAUSE THE TRANSMITTER
TO SHUTDOWN AND BE OFF AIR.

5.3.3 Periodic Cleaning and Inspection

The FAX power block should be periodically opened, inspected for dust buildup, and cleaned. This inspection should
also check for signs of progressive damage, such as cracking cables or evidence of heat stress/burning. In the case of
a single power block transmitter, the transmitter must be switched off and mains power removed to safely perform
the steps given below. In the case of larger model transmitters (FAX20kW - FAX40kW), one power block may be
shut down and serviced while the other(s) continue transmitting. Please consult section 5 for a procedure to follow
to safely service one PA chassis at a time.

STEP 1 While transmitter is still operating at full power, inspect all external transmission line
sections for localized discolorations or “hot spots” that are warm/hot to the touch.
a.If localized heating is found, switch off transmitter, open transmission line, and inspect for loose
bullets (anchor connectors), split bullets, contaminations, or other irregularities.
STEP 2 Press front panel OFF button to switch transmitter off.
STEP 3 Remove all AC mains power to transmitter, including exciter(s).
STEP 4 Take steps to ensure AC mains connection is securely locked out and inadvertent mains
re-application is not possible while maintenance is being performed.
STEP 5 Open all mains access panels and inspect all mains connections for tightness, corrosion,
or signs of localized burning.
STEP 6 Use hex key to open amplifier chassis rear door.
STEP 7 Verify no loose hardware has fallen to bottom of amplifier chassis over time.
STEP 8 Vacuum any dust accumulations from rear chamber of amplifier chassis.
STEP 9 Vacuum any dust accumulations from output assembly. Use long vacuum cleaner
attachment as necessary to gain access to hard to access spots.
STEP 10 Vacuum any dust accumulations from chassis fan blades and PS module fan blades.
STEP 11 Illuminate inside of transmitter rear chamber and inspect all cables for signs of cracking,
abrasions, or heat discoloration.
STEP 12 Inspect all exposed PC boards for signs of heat discoloration or rings of dried solder flux,
an indication of partial solder melting.
STEP 13 Shine light through combiner cover (but do not remove) to inspect output assembly
combiner coils for any corrosion that is crusty or pasty. It is normal for the coils to change
color over time. This does not negatively impact their performance, provided it is simple
oxidation and not a more aggressive corrosion due to harsh air pollution components.
STEP 14 Verify all push-on (faston) connections are fully seated on PA backplanes, PS interface
board, AC mains inputs, etc.
STEP 15 Shine light through combiner support frame to deck of output assembly and inspect
ballast loads for burning or cracking.
STEP 16 Close amplifier chassis rear door.
STEP 17 Return hex key to storage position.
STEP 18 If transmitter is FAX20kW, visually inspect the 6kW RF reject load on rack cabinet upper
rear for signs of cracked resistors or other debris.
STEP 19 Remove AC mains lockout precautions and apply AC mains power.
STEP 20 Press front panel ON button to turn transmitter on.
STEP 21 Verify transmitter returns to full power and no alarms are reported.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-11
January 18, 2021

STEP 22 As desired, use off-air opportunity to verify integrity of all safety interlock circuits such as
station load temp sensor, patch panel position switches, coaxial switch position switches,
etc.
STEP 23 As desired, use off-air opportunity to operate transmitter into station test load and verify
test load integrity.
STEP 24 As desired, use off-air opportunity to verify reserve exciter and exciter switchover
functionality (where applicable).
STEP 25 As desired, use off-air opportunity to verify reserve IPA and IPA switchover functionality.
STEP 26 Note any findings and resolutions in station maintenance log.

5.4 Control and Display Battery

The Control and Display Board battery (20mm, 3V, lithium coin battery CR2032) is normally installed at the factory.
This battery has two purposes, to store the on/off latch and to keep the date and time in case of power
interruption. Check and verify battery is installed. The battery mounts on the front panel Display/Control board.

Warning
THE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AT LEAST EVERY YEAR. THE BATTERY
STORES THE STATE THE OF ON/OFF LATCH. IF THE BATTERY IS LOW, THE
TRANSMITTER WILL RETURN IN THE OFF STATE AFTER AN AC POWER LOSS.

Perform the following steps to install or replace the battery.


STEP 1 Open front panel by turning the upper and lower thumb screws counterclockwise.
STEP 2 Swing the panel door open to access the Display/Control board located along the top
inside of the door. Note, the battery holder is located on the upper left hand corner of the
board.
STEP 3 Remove battery from package (Pt. No. 660-0054-000) and slide battery into holder, with
positive side up against clip, until it is fully seated.

Figure 5-1 Date and Time Battery Location

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-12 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

5.5 PA/PS Replacement

5.5.1 Changing PA, IPA, & Power Supply Modules

The PA modules are hot-pluggable and may be swapped at any time while the transmitter is operating. Any PA
module may be swapped with a PA module in another position, including the PA module in the IPA position.

* FAX 7.5kW, 10kW XP and Fax 15kW have 5 PA and no IPA modules.

Figure 5-2 Module Locations

Note
The IPA and PA modules are heavy for their size. Be prepared to support the weight when module is
removed. Pa modules are designed to handle very high temperatures and may be extremely hot. Do not
touch module sides with bare hands after transmitter has been running, especially in high ambient tem-
perature environments.

Note
The IPA module contains two IPA amplifiers with a green “ON” status LED for each module half visible
from the front of the IPA module. If the 10kW Transmitter is operating with power out and the IPA is
removed, the transmitter will stop producing RF and therefore will be off-the-air. In the 20/30/40kW
Transmitters, only the affected Power Block will stop producing RF causing a decrease in total system
power out.

STEP 1 Verify which module is faulted. Use same procedure for the IPA module. In the 10kW
Transmitter, removing the IPA while the transmitter is operating will cause the
transmitter to stop producing RF and become off-the-air. In the 20/30/40kW Transmitters,
only the affected Power Block will stop producing RF causing a reduction in total output
power.
STEP 2 Open amplifier front door by loosening the 2 thumbscrews.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-13
January 18, 2021

STEP 3 Remove faulted PA module from transmitter by pulling module forward and out of the
slot. There are not latches holding the module in place.
STEP 4 MAKE SURE THE REPLACEMENT IS THE SAME MODEL NUMBER. Insert replacement PA
module. Normally, the PA module will turn on automatically. Pressing the front panel ON
button will also create an ON command for all modules without any interruption of
system operation.
STEP 5 If desired, use the front panel LCD Display, or use a pc connected to the front panel
Ethernet port, to check all PA module currents to verify new PA module has a current
draw similar to all other modules.
STEP 6 Close amplifier front door.

5.5.2 Power Supply Module Replacement Procedure

The PS modules are hot-pluggable and may be swapped at any time while the transmitter is operating. Any PS
module may be swapped with a PS module in another position.

STEP 1 Verify which module is faulted.


STEP 2 Open amplifier front door. Grab the top lip of the PS module and push the metal clip up to
release the handle and pull supply straight out.
STEP 3 Allow the power supply to sit removed from its slot for about 5 minutes.
STEP 4 Re-insert the module back in to the slot and check to see of the faults return. If the faults
do not return let the supply run for 30 minutes, if no faults leave the supply in the slot.
STEP 5 If faults return remove the power supply from the slot.

Figure 5-3 PS module Handle Release.

STEP 6 MAKE SURE THE REPLACEMENT IS THE SAME MODEL NUMBER. Insert replacement PS
module with slight pressure to the LEFT to follow the divider for proper engagement. The
two right-most LEDs should light Green automatically once PS module is fully engaged.
STEP 7 Be sure PS module is firmly in place and the metal clip in the upper left corner secures the
PS front piece. It may be necessary to press the ON button to clear the faults to allow the
module to turn on.
STEP 8 Close amplifier front door.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-14 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

5.6 Configuration File, Fault Logs and Software Upload

5.6.1 Config File Save/Upload

Once your transmitter has been installed and configured properly it is a good idea to save the configuration file in
case the need to upload it in the future comes up. The information is stored on the Control and Display Board, in
case of failure of that card you will need to upload a saved configuration. This file should be saved each time there is
a change made to configuration, calibration or new software is uploaded. Use a file naming scheme that allows for
easy access to the correct file and date it.

5.6.2 Save Config File

STEP 1 Connect the PC to the transmitter using a Ethernet cable to either the front or rear
Ethernet port. See Section 3.8 for Network setup information.
STEP 2 Open a web browser and establish a connection, once there is a connection navigate to
the System>> System Setup>>Network>> ISP menu.
STEP 3 Click on the Configuration Tab and the DOWNLOAD button will appear. See Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 FAX ISP Screen

STEP 4 Click the DOWNLOAD button. A dialog box will open, click on Save File and OK.
STEP 5 A new dialog box will open, browse to the disk location to save the file. Rename the file
using a naming convention so it is know what this file is. For example, FAX10-install-
09102013 for FAX 10 saved on install with the date of installation.

5.6.3 Upload Config File

STEP 1 Establish a connection to the transmitter with a PC.


STEP 2 System>> System Setup>>Network>> ISP menu. See Figure 5-5
STEP 3 Click Browse and locate the correct file for the upload. The default name given by the FAX
is eeprom. This name may vary if the name was changed when saved from transmitter.
Also note that it is best to have this file located on your hard disk drive not on a
removable stick.
STEP 4 Click on the file, then Open and the box should populate with the file location and name.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-15
January 18, 2021

STEP 5 Click Submit button and the file should upload. Once the upload is complete a PROGRAM
button will appear.

Figure 5-5 FAX ISP Program Screen


STEP 6 Click on the PROGRAM button, a box should pop up and state that the transmitter will
loose communication and loss of RF output. Click OK, when programming is complete the
transmitter will reboot.

5.6.4 Software Update Procedure

The following steps detail the procedure to update the FAX series transmitter software. You will need a PC to the
Ethernet port to perform this procedure. Once the software has been uploaded and programmed the transmitter
will reboot and the station will be off the air for a brief period.

The latest software files can be obtained on the GatesAir Customer Portal. All customers should register at the
website to obtain any updated software, manual and documentation packages.

Note
A55 code or later will automatically push software updates to FAX exciters during updgrades. To upgrade
the transmitter seperately use the ISP function in the web GUI.

STEP 1 Connect the PC to the transmitter using a Ethernet cable to either the front or rear
Ethernet port. See Section 3.8 for Network setup information.
STEP 2 Open a web browser (Firefox preferred) and establish a connection to the transmitter.
STEP 3 Once the connection is made go back to the address bar and type in /isp after the IP
Address. For example if using the front panel Ethernet port type 192.168.117.88/isp.
Screen should appear as in Figure 5-6.

Figure 5-6 FAX isp Home Screen

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-16 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

STEP 4 Click Browse and locate the correct file for the upload. This file should be named
something like FAX_CONTROLLER_APP_REVG_0018.s19. This name may vary some. Also
note that it is best to have this file located on your hard disk drive not on a removable
stick.
STEP 5 Click on the file and the box should populate with its location on the disk. Press SUBMIT.
The file will begin to upload, do not press any keys until the screen appears like Figure 5-
7. The file size will vary depending on Rev.

Figure 5-7 isp Program Screen

STEP 6 The code is now in memory inside the transmitter but has not been programmed. Click
on the PROGRAM button, the message "Programming Flash..." and "Rebooting..." should
appear.
STEP 7 Transmitter should reboot.
STEP 8 Go back to the IP address of the transmitter and Login, verify the code took by navigating
to the System>>Service>>Version screen. Verify the software revisions.

5.7 System Calibration Procedures

5.7.1 System Forward/Reflected Power Calibration

The output power of the transmitter system is accurately calibrated at the factory using a precision Calorimeter and
load. There is no separate calibration for reflected power, once the forward is calibrated the computer automatically
calibrates the reflected power in the same calibration routine. There are separate calibrations for each type of mod-
ulation, FM, FM+HD and HD. If the transmitter is used for more than one mode, each modulation type used must be
calibrated. The calibration is stored in the transmitter memory and can also be downloaded to a config file and
stored for use in the case of a failed Control and Display Board. If the transmitter system needs calibration, a cali-
brated power meter is required, either in-line or a stand-alone meter such as an Agilent 4418 or equivalent. If the
transmitter is running one of the iboc modes, ensure that the power meter is capable of measuring digital modula-
tion.

Note
Fax High Power models (5K, 7.5K, 10K, 20K, 30K and 40K) are calibrated at a single frequency. The
system is broadband and can be used at any frequency in the FM band, however a complete power cali-
bration will be required if changing frequencies.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-17
January 18, 2021

Note
If calibrating in the power in HD Only mode of operation, the power calibrated to should be 5 % higher
than the TPO the transmitter will run at. ie a TPO of 10 kW should be calibrated at 10.5 kW. Once cali-
bration is complete use the lower button to set the transmitter at TPO.

Power Calibration Check (Start at Step 2 for External Meter):

STEP 1 If using an in-line meter it should read the same as the transmitter front panel meter. If readings
do not match (Typically within 5%) system power calibration may be required. To calibrate skip to
the perform calibration routine below.
STEP 2 If using an external meter please refer to the factory test data that was shipped with the
transmitter, it has the calibration factors that can be entered into the wattmeter. These readings
take the loss of the cables and splitter into account. On the page that has the "Transmitter Power
Readings", there are the Front and Rear Sample Port Coupling Factors.
STEP 3 On a FAX5/7.5/10 the Front reading is the SMA connector on the front door of the transmitter. On
FAX15/20/30/40 the Front is the SMA connector inside the front door on power block one that is
next to the Multi-Unit Control Board.
STEP 4 On a FAX5/7.5/10 the rear is the Mod Monitor BNC on the back panel. On a FAX15/20/30/40 the
Rear is the J5 that is located directly on the output directional coupler.
STEP 5 Use the correct coupling factor based on which location that the wattmeter will be connected.
Enter this coupling factor into the wattmeter. Please refer to the wattmeter’s instruction manual
on how to enter it.

To perform calibration perform the following steps.

Warning
A KNOWN GOOD DUMMY LOAD CAPABLE OF HANDLING THE FULL RATED
POWER MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUT TO PER-
FORM A POWER CALIBRATION.

STEP 6 Turn transmitter system on and operate at rated power for a minimum of 30 minutes
STEP 7 Be sure transmitter remote is in DISABLE. If not, press the DISABLE button.
STEP 8 In the SETUP>TX CALIBIBRATE>TX POWER CAL menu verify that the correct modulation type is
shown. There are 3 possible types, FM, FM+HD and HD. If the correct modulation is not shown,
refer to the exciter to correct it.
STEP 9 Once the modulation type is correct, set the TX TPO to the correct power for the transmitter. In HD
ONLY mode this power should be set to 5 % more than TPO for calibration. Press the enter button
and the highlight should go away. At the bottom of the screen the message "PHASE 1 Done"
should appear after a few seconds.
STEP 10 Go to the exciter and set its forward power until the in-line or external wattmeter reads the same
as the TX TPO setting in Step 4. Refer to the exciter instruction manual to adjust the forward
power. This adjustment is done in the FAX exciter by changing the exciter's external APC gain on
its LCD.
STEP 11 Once the meters match allow the power to settle for a few seconds to ensure the transmitter is
stable.
STEP 12 Go to the Calibrate line and change it to "YES" and press the enter button. The transmitter will
begin calibration, and the message "IN PROGRESS" will appear. This will take several seconds, do
not press any keys at this time.
STEP 13 The message "DONE" should appear on the LCD. Calibration is now complete for both forward
and reflected power and the meter readings should be the same.
STEP 14 For HD Only mode, use the Lower power button to set the transmitter to TPO.

If the transmitter is to be used in more than one modulation mode, repeat this procedure for each mode.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-18 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

5.7.2 Power Block Power Calibration FAX15/20/30/40 Only

The following procedure details how to calibrate forward and reflected power each of the power blocks in a 20kW or
larger system. Each power block makes up a portion of the total power in the transmitter system. For example in a
FAX30 each power block outputs 10 kW or 1/3 the total power. However, the power block has to overcome some
losses in the splitting and combining inside each block. For calibration we will assume this to be approximately 2%,
this factor will be included in the calibration. So in the case of a FAX30 running a full 30 kW each power block will be
calibrated at 10 kW + 2%(200 Watts) or 10.2 kW. For HD Mode this will be 7 %.This formula should be used to deter-
mine the approximate power to calibrate each power block in your transmitter. The power blocks should only need
calibration when the power block System Interface Board is replaced or the TPO of the transmitter is increased
above where the factory calibrated it. The power block only requires one calibration regardless of how many modes
of operation the transmitter may run. The power calibration should be completed for the mode that runs the high-
est power out, typically FM+HD. For example if running FM+HD and FM only as backup the power blocks only
require calibration in the FM+HD mode.

Note
If running in the HD Only mode as the main mode or the only mode the transmitter is used in, the calibra-
tion should be done by adding 7 % to the power block power. ie 10 kW +7 % or 10.7 kW.

STEP 1 Ensure the System forward power is calibrated and the transmitter is running at that
power for a minimum of 30 minutes.
STEP 2 Go to SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>PWR BLOCK CAL
STEP 3 Verify the correct Modulation Type, FM, FM+HD or HD. If the correct modulation is not
shown, refer to the exciter to correct it.
STEP 4 Set the UNIT POWER to the value calculated using the formula described above.
STEP 5 To set the gain correctly, access to the System Interface Board in each power block will be
required. This is the board located to the right of the power supplies behind the Unit
Controller panel.
STEP 6 Notice on the LCD a voltage reading for each power blocks forward and reflected power.
Using S9 (raise) and S11 (lower) on each System Interface Board, set each power block so
the forward reading is 3.49 V. See Figure 5-8 for switch location.
STEP 7
.
Set Dipswitch S2 (top of the board on the left) section 8 (far right section of S2) to ON.
This puts the board in the calibration mode.

Figure 5-8 Power Block System Interface Control Board.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-19
January 18, 2021

STEP 8 Now adjust reflected S12 (lower) ad S13 (raise) so the Reflected voltage value for forward
and reflected (using forward and reflected for same power block) match. Repeat for each
power block.
STEP 9 Go to Calibrate, change to YES and press Enter. Once the message DONE appears,
STEP 10 Set Dispswitch S2-8 on all power blocks to OFF.
STEP 11 Calibration is complete.

5.7.3 Transmitter Air Flow Calibration

The following procedure is used to calibrate the Airflow in each power block to insure proper cooling of the
transmitter system. This is done at the factory prior to shipping and should not have to be done unless the Power
Supply Interface board is replaced or high altitude installations. The transmitter has variable speed fans and is
calibrated at 100% which is full speed. Under normal conditions the fans will run at about 70 - 90%, under fault
conditions the fans will ramp up to full speed. On some older model units, the fans were single speed and do not
require calibration.

STEP 1 Be sure there are no obstructions on the top or back areas of the transmitter cabinet.
Periodically check the air filters for dirt buildup. It is very important to keep the filters
clean at all times. The front door must be CLOSED during calibration.
STEP 1 Go to SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>AIRFLOW SET
STEP 2 To get fans to run at full speed a fault must be created. The easiest way is to pull one PA
module from its slot in the power block that is being calibrated. Be sure not to pull the
IPA or the transmitter will be off-air. The fans should ramp up to full speed.
STEP 3 For the power block that is being calibrated only, go to PBx AIRFLOW menu.
STEP 4 SET PBx 100%, change to YES and press enter. AIRFLOW CAL should read 100%.
STEP 5 Reinstall the PA module and fans should ramp down in speed.
STEP 6 Allow a few minutes for the air flow to stabilize. Verify the air flow reading is less than
2500mv for the PB. If it is greater than 2500mv the fan speed will need to be increased.
On the inside of the rear door, observe the fan dip switch settings on the Fan Control
Board; S1-3 is low, S1-4 is medium and S1-5 is high fan speed. Increase your fan speed
until the PBx AIRFLOW is less than 2500mv. Only one dipswitch should be set to the ON
position.
STEP 7 Repeat this procedure for each power block in the transmitter.

5.7.4 Exciter Power Calibration/Switchover Threshold

The FAX transmitter does not measure exciter power internally, it uses a dc voltage from the exciter that is
proportional to the Exciters RF output. This voltage is in the Exciter interface cable and comes in for each exciter in
the system. If using dual exciters each exciter will require calibration. No wattmeter is required, the FAX is calibrated
by matching it to the exciters front panel power reading. If the exciter switchover threshold needs to be set or
adjusted, first verify the both exciters power meters match the power meter displayed on the FAX and the EXC PWR
voltage is in range. If necessary do the Exciter Power Calibration steps before proceeding on to setting the
switchover threshold.

Exciter Power Calibration

STEP 1 Go to SETUP>EXCITER SETUP. The exciter selected should be the one that is presently on-
air.
STEP 2 Go to EXC PWR CAL menu.
STEP 3 Ensure Modulation type is correct.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-20 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

STEP 4 EXC PWR reading should be in the range of 1000 to 2000 mV. If not go to the exciter and
set the scaling for forward power so the voltage is in range. Although the minimum
voltage for setup is 100 mV for reliable operation of this feature keep the voltage in the
range stated.
STEP 5 Set the EPWR CAL value to match the exciter power reading. Notice that this reading is in
milliwatts. Some exciters such as the Flexstar read in Watts, so 2 watts will be 2000
milliwatts
STEP 6 Change CALIBRATE to Yes and press Enter button.
STEP 7 Repeat for Exciter B if required.
STEP 8 Exciter Calibration Complete

Exciter Switchover Threshold Setup (Dual Exciters ONLY)


STEP 1 With the transmitter running at TPO, navigate to SETUP>>TX CONTROL and set the
following:
• APC to OFF
• EXC SW MODE to MAN
• EXC ON AIR to the exciter that the threshold is being set for A or B
STEP 2 Navigate to SETUP>>EXCITER SETUP and set the exciter to A or B to match Step 1
STEP 3 Navigate to SETUP>>EXCITER SETUP>>EXC PWR CAL
STEP 4 Lower the exciter power out until the transmitter has reached a point where the exciter
switchover should occur, ie 75 % of TPO.
STEP 5 Verify the EXC PWR voltage is in the range of 100 to 2000 mV.

Note
If the threshold is set when the voltage is outside this range the switchover will default to 40 % of exciter
power which will be near 0 Watts out of the the transmitter.

STEP 6 Change the SET THRESHOLD to YES and press ENTER.


STEP 7 Change to the other exciter and repeat these steps for switching in the other direction.
STEP 8 Reset the APC to ON and EXC SW Mode back to Auto.
STEP 9 End of procedure.

5.7.5 Power Supply Voltage Set

The FAX transmitter allows the user to se the DC voltage output of the power supplies to obtain either best overall
efficiency in the Class C (FM) mode or for best spectral performance in Class AB(HD modes). The FAX allows the
power supplies to be set in the range of 44 VDC to 52 VDC. In Class C the lower the voltage typically the better the
efficiency. In Class AB care should be taken not to lower the voltage to a point that the RF output spectrum exceeds
the mask. If changing this setting in HD modes turn RTAC off and verify the spectrum performance has not
significantly degraded when changing the voltage. The power supply voltage setting is stored for each mode (FM,
FM+HD and HD), if using more than one mode the voltage must be set for each.

STEP 1 Go to SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>POWER SUPPLY SET


STEP 2 Ensure Modulation type is correct.
STEP 3 Change the PS VOLTS to the desired voltage. It is not necessary to turn transmitter off to
change the voltage.
STEP 4 Change SET to Yes and press enter button.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-21
January 18, 2021

5.7.6 Reject Load Calibration (Power/Fan Speed) FAX15/20/30/40 Only

Reject loads are only used in the FAX15/20/30/40 to combine multiple power blocks and cabinets. In a FAX15/20
there is only one Reject load, in a FAX30 and FAX40 there are three. Each load must be calibrated separately.
Typically reject load calibration is only required if replacing the entire reject load or the fan control board mounted
to the reject load. The fan control board provides the RF detector for the reject load calibration.

Power Block Combiner (6 kW) Load Calibration Procedure:

STEP 1 Go to SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>REJ LOAD CAL>SYSTEM REJ CAL


STEP 2 Remove the IPA in one power block only.
STEP 3 Verify the REJ SENSE voltage reading is between 3.2 and 3.8 V. If this voltage is off it may
be necessary to set the gain on the Fan Control board that is mounted on the Reject Load
being calibrated. The gain can be set by changing S1 sections 7 and 8.
STEP 4 Verify that the fans are running at full speed by checking TP5 on fan board for reject load
being calibrated for greater than 4 VDC. On Rev C or later boards Yellow DS7 will turn on
indicating full speed. If this is not on change the setting of S1 sections 3,4,5 until TP5 is
greater than 4 VDC or DS7 lights. One of the sections should be ON.
STEP 5 Change SYS SET 100% to YES and press Enter button.
STEP 6 For FAX30/40 repeat for other cabinet power block combiner load
Cabinet Combiner (12 kW) Load Calibration Procedure:

STEP 1 Go to SETUP>TX CALIBRATE>REJ LOAD CAL>SYSTEM REJ CAL


STEP 2 To get 100% power into the cabinet combiner reject load pull both IPA in one cabinet or
turn the AC mains off to one cabinet.
STEP 3 Verify the REJ SENSE voltage reading is between 3.2 and 3.8 V. If this voltage is off it may
be necessary to set the gain on the Fan Control board that is mounted on the Reject Load
being calibrated. The gain can be set by changing S1 sections 7 and 8.
STEP 4 Verify that the fans are running at full speed by checking TP5 on fan board for reject load
being calibrated for greater than 4 VDC. On Rev C or later boards Yellow DS7 will turn on
indicating full speed. If this is not on change the setting of S1 sections 3,4,5 until TP5 is
greater than 4 VDC or DS7 lights. One of the sections should be ON.
STEP 5 Once voltage is in range, change SYS SET 100% to YES and press Enter button.

5.7.7 Backup Control Mode Power Setting


In the event that the Micro Module would fail the transmitter will revert to backup control. In backup control the
power control reference from the micro is lost and the potentiometer on the System Interface Board or Multi-Unit
Interface in FAX15/20/30/40, becomes the power reference. This pot can be set to the full range of the transmitter RF
power capability. This pot is set at the factory to the customer TPO on the sales order. If adjustment is required it is
not necessary to take the transmitter off air.

STEP 1 On the System Interface board or the Multi-Unit Interface on the FAX15/20/30/40, set the
Normal/Backup switch to Backup. Red Backup Mode LED should be on
STEP 2 Adjust the PWR SET located on System Interface board or the Multi-Unit Interface pot to
desired power
STEP 3 Set the switch back to Normal. Red Backup Mode LED should be off

5.7.8 UPS Mode Power Setup


User Remote J1 Pin 8 on the rear of the transmitter, Power Block 1 in FAX15/20/30/40, sets the FAX into the UPS
mode. This line would typically come from a UPS or a AC Mains generator to set the transmitter to a power out at a

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-22 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

point that the generator was capable of supplying enough power without being overdissapated. It also can be used
in the event the transmitter needed to be turned down in power to do maintenance on the system or antenna.

STEP 1 With the transmitter ON, ground pin 8 of User Remote J1. This must be a continuous
ground
STEP 2 If this has not be field set the transmitter should drop to about 25 % power and System
LED should be yellow.
STEP 3 Using the Raise/Lower buttons on the front panel, set the power to desired level. If this
point is below the RF Output Warning/Fault Threshold settings you will get an alarm.
STEP 4 Remove ground from J1-8 and transmitter should return to normal power out

5.7.9 System PA Efficiency Procedure (FM+HD or HD Modes Only)

STEP 1 Decrease PA voltage 0.5 volts.


STEP 2 Complete RTAC one time adapt.
STEP 3 Verify unit is in mask.
STEP 4 Measure efficiency.
Repeat the process until you can no longer meet mask. Increase PA voltage to allow you to meet mask.

5.7.10 IPA Bypass FAX 5/7.5/10XP/15 Only


If a situation ever arises where the IPA system must be bypassed, there is a convenient way to feed the Exciter RF
output directly to the input of the 2-way divider that feeds the PAs. This bypasses not only the IPA but also the RF
Switch board. Depending on the exciter it may not be able t o output enough power to reach the TPO, however the
transmitter will be on the air.

STEP 1 Depress front panel "OFF " button and open front door.
STEP 2 Before connecting the exciter to J4, ensure its RF level is set to about 5 watts.
STEP 3 Remove the coax on J4 BNC and connect the exciter RF output to J4.
STEP 4 Un-mute the transmitter and exciter. Raise the exciter power until the transmitter is back
to its TPO or 60 watts (150 watts for the Fax 7.5 and Fax 10K XP, 300 watts for 15kW)
which maximum safe power into the splitter.

Figure 5-9 PA Bypass J4

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-23
January 18, 2021

5.8 Board and Assembly Replacement Procedures

5.8.1 Backplane Board Replacement

There are 4 Backplane boards in each 10kW Power Block. The function of the Backplane Board is to interface the
Controller, Power Supply, and RF signals to each PA Module. When installing a new Backplane Board, it is important
to set all 8 of the switches on Dipswitch S1 to the same settings as the switches on the board being replaced.

STEP 1 Remove all power from the transmitter


STEP 2 Remove the 2 PA modules that plug into the backplane being removed.
STEP 3 Open the back door of the transmitter block to gain access to the boards.
STEP 4 The make access to the backplane easier, unbolt the Splitter/Reject load assembly. This is
the large assembly with the two heatsinks mounted to the right wall in the rear of the
cabinet. It is not necessary to completely remove the assembly but it helps to move it
away to gain access to the right side.
STEP 5 To remove the Splitter assembly, first remove the 10 or 14 coaxes off the combiner.
STEP 6 There are four nuts that hold the assembly in place two at the top and two on the
bottom. Remove all four.

Note
During re-assembly, the Black power supply wires attach to the aluminum cover panel.

Figure 5-10 PA Backplane Boards

STEP 7 Note where all the wires are located, ensure that they go back to the same location when
re-assembling the unit.
STEP 8 Remove the ribbon cable, DC Power cables and RF connectors from the backplane being
replaced.
STEP 9 Using a small phillips screwdriver, remove the nine silver screws from the backplane. Lift
the backplane from the cabinet.

Note
Do not remove any brass screws.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-24 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

STEP 10 Set the dipswitch on the new board to match the board just removed.
STEP 11 Install the new backplane into the transmitter and secure with the nine screws.
STEP 12 Replace the RF cables, DC power Cables and the ribbon cable to the same location they
were removed from.
STEP 13 Re-install the Splitter/Reject load assembly to the right side wall on the transmitter.
STEP 14 Re-connect the coaxes to the combiner.
STEP 15 Re-install PA modules and turn transmitter ON.

5.8.2 System Interface Control Board Replacement

The following instructions explain how to replace a System Interface Control PWA including the correct setting of all
PWA switches. The high power Flexiva FAX series of transmitters all use the same System Interface Control PWA. In
the 10kW Transmitter and 10kW Power Block, the System Interface Module is located on the right end of the Power
Supply Modules. In the 15kW/20kW/30kW/40kW Transmitters, a second Interface Module is utilized in the Primary
Power Block and it is called the Multi Unit System Interface Module. The Multi Unit Module interfaces with all of the
other System Interface Modules in each Power Block. The hardware for each is identical, the difference is the
switch settings that determine of the board is a power block controller or a system controller.

The replacement Rev “E” or higher PWA is universal which means it can be used in either location and will replace
older versions of the same PWA, however do not set the dipswiches to match earlier version boards as some new
parameters have been added. Dipswitch settings are used to designate which Power Block and position the PWA
will be used. Dipswitch settings are also used to identify which GatesAir Exciter is being utilized in the system.
Please see section 5.4.4 for guidance on proper settings for your model FAX transmitter. Figure 5-17 above
illustrates the location of the Multi Unit System Interface PWA and the System Interface Controller PWA within the
10 kW Power Block. \

Note
When replacing the System Interface board when it is setup as a System controller, RF Power calibra-
tion should be verified. When replacing the System Interface as a power block controller, power block
calibration is required.

To remove the System Interface Unit Control PWA, begin by removing 2 Phillips screws from the front of the System
Interface Module. See Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11 System Interface Control Module Mounting Screws

Carefully pull the module straight out. The right side of the metal housing sits in a guide mounted on the chassis
shelf.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-25
January 18, 2021

Figure 5-12 System Interface Control PWA

Carefully remove the ribbon cable connectors, 5 SMA connectors and the power supply connector. All of the cables
are labelled to make re-connection easier.

Figure 5-13 System Interface Control Cables Removed

After the Module is removed, use a Phillips screw driver to remove the PWA from the metal housing it attached to by
removing 6 Phillips screws. Attach the replacement PWA to the metal housing. Set the dipswitches to match the
removed boards on Rev E and higher PWA’s. If replacing a PWA Rev D or earlier refer to Section 5.4.4 for a
description of each switch. The board will come in the factory default positions.
Verify system and power block calibrations are still correct.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-26 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

5.8.3 Multi Unit System Interface Board Replacement

To replace the PWA in the Multi Unit System Interface Module, begin by removing the 2 front Phillip
screws securing the sheet metal tray the module is mounted on. Carefully slide the module out then remove
the 4 Phillips screws that attach the cover to the module.

Figure 5-14 Removing Multi Unit System Interface Control Module and Cover

Figure 5-15 Remove Multi Unit System Interface Control Module Cables

After the Module is removed, use a Phillips screw driver to remove the PWA from the metal housing it attached to by
removing 6 Phillips screws. Attach the replacement PWA to the metal housing. Set the dipswitches to match the
removed boards on Rev E and higher PWA’s. If replacing a PWA Rev D or earlier refer to Section 5.4.4 for a
description of each switch. The board will come in the factory default positions.
Verify that the system power calibration is still correct.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-27
January 18, 2021

5.8.4 Control and Display Board Replacement

The following steps explain how to change the Control and Display Board. The transmitter configuration is stored on
this board, if this file was not downloaded from the transmitter and stored, a copy can be obtained from GatesAir.
However, this file will not have any changes that have been made since it left the GatesAir factory. If Ethernet
connectivity is still available, got to Section 5.6.2 in this section of the manual and download the file prior to removal
of the board.

STEP 1 Remove all AC power to the transmitter.


STEP 2 Unplug the Ethernet cable. Remove all cables from the board.
STEP 3 Remove the board from the front door. Remove the Ethernet cable if not already done.
STEP 4 If the replacement board does not have a Micro Module attached, the existing one can be
reused.
STEP 5 If a replacement MC Module is not fully programmed (LCD blank) then use front Ethernet
192.168.117.88 with browser on board the software to use the ISP to load.
STEP 6 If required install existing Micro to new board and install the board back on the front
door.
STEP 7 Replace all cables
STEP 8 Turn on the AC power and connect computer to one of the Ethernet ports.
STEP 9 Upload a configuration file to the transmitter. See Section 5.6.3 in this section of the
manual for procedure.
STEP 10 Turn transmitter on and verify correct operation.

Figure 5-16 Control and Display Board with Micro Module

5.8.5 10-way/14-Way Power Splitter Assembly Replacement

The following instructions explain how to replace the Splitter Assembly in the rear of a 10 kW power block. These
instructions can also be followed to remove the splitter for easier access to the Power Supply Interface PWA that is
mounted behind it.

Caution
THE SPLITTER ASSEMBLY ALSO CONTAINS THE REJECT LOAD RESISTORS FOR
THE 10/14-WAY COMBINER AND IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE HIGH
TEMPERATURES. IF THERE IS AN IMBALANCE IN THE POWER BLOCK DUE TO
FAILURE OF PA MODULES THE HEATSINK COULD BE HOT. VERIFY ASSEMBLY IS
COOL TO PRIOR TO TOUCHING.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-28 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

STEP 1 Remove all power to the transmitter.


STEP 2 Open the back door to the power block that the splitter is to be replaced in.
STEP 3 Remove the coaxes that are attached from the splitter to the combiner. These
connections are not critical and can be reconnected in any location.
STEP 4 Remove the 4 nuts and hardware holding the assembly in place. There are 2 on the
bottom and 2 on the right side wall at the top of the assembly. See the following Figure
for nut locations.

Figure 5-17 Splitter Nut Locations

STEP 5 The splitter still has the coaxes to the PA Backplane boards attached. The splitter can be
lifted but not removed. With a 5/16" wrench loosen each of the SMA coaxes and remove
them from the backplane boards. Also remove the IPA input coax located on the side of
the Splitter near the middle of the assembly.
STEP 6 Carefully remove the splitter. Reverse these steps to replace the new assembly.

5.8.6 10/14-Way Combiner Assembly Replacement

The following instructions explain how to replace the Combiner Assembly in the rear of a power block. These
instructions can also be followed to remove the combiner for easier access to the Power Supply Interface PWA that
is mounted behind it. Prior to removal the transmission line connected to the RF output will need to be removed. In
higher power FAX transmitters, 20 kW and above, the combiners will need to be removed as well. See the
procedures in this section of the manual on how to remove them.

STEP 1 Remove all power to the transmitter.


STEP 2 Open the back door to the power block that the combiner is to be replaced in. Remove
the 10 - 14 coaxes that are attached from the splitter to the combiner. These are the
reject load connections which are not critical and can be reconnected in any location.
STEP 3 Remove the hose clamp from the RF output connector. Then remove all of the hardware
at the arrows shown in Figure 5-24 below. This will allow the panel to be tilted up and
out of the way.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 5-29
January 18, 2021

Figure 5-18 Remove Hardware at these locations

STEP 4 Remove the SMA coaxes on the directional coupler assembly. A 5/16" wrench may be
required to loosen them.
STEP 5 Remove the 4 nuts and hardware holding the combiner assembly in place. There are 2 on
each side of the combiner assembly. See Figure 5-24 below for nut locations.

Figure 5-19 14-Way Combiner Nut Locations

STEP 6 The combiner still has the coaxes to the PA Backplane boards attached. The combiner can
be leaned forward but not removed. After tilting the assembly forward, carefully remove
each of the coaxes that are attached to the backplane boards.
STEP 7 The combiner assembly can now be removed from the power block. Reverse these steps
to replace with the new assembly.

5.8.7 15kW 2-way splitter

The FAX 15kW has a 2-way splitter located at the top of the lower power block. The following instructions explain
how to replace the 2-way splitter.
STEP 1 Remove all power to the transmitter.
STEP 2 Open the front door on the lower power block.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
5-30 Section-5 Maintenance
January 18, 2021

STEP 3 Remove two philips head screws identified below.

Figure 5-20 System Drive Splitter removal


STEP 4 Tilt the Drive Splitter forward by raising the rear of the splitter to allow it to clear the top
lip of the cabinet as you pull it out.

Figure 5-21 Angle forward and remove


STEP 5 Carefully remove the splitter.
STEP 6 Remove two wire connectors and three BNC connectors.
STEP 7 Reverse the order to install the new assembly.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-1
January 18, 2021

6 Section-6 Diagnostics

6.1 Introduction

This section contains diagnostic and troubleshooting information for the Flexiva FAX FM/HD Series of Transmitters.
Should difficulties arise with your FAX transmitter, use the information in this section to help locate and correct the
problem.

6.2 Troubleshooting Tables

This section provides troubleshooting tables for FAX series transmitters covered in this manual. The reader is
encouraged to carefully study the table in its entirety even if the transmitter is operating without any problems at
the present time. Becoming familiar with the following information will be helpful to diagnose and repair problems
should any arise in the future.

6.2.1 LED Indicator Explanation

GREEN: Means OK. Does not need any attention

AMBER: Means WARNING. Transmitter is operating but there’s a problem. Should be investigated ASAP.

RED: Means FAULT. Something in the transmitter system has faulted and requires immediate attention. Transmitter
could be off-air.

6.2.2 Transmitter Front Panel Controller LED Indicators

Figure 6-1 shows the FAX transmitter front panel operating with no Faults and the Remote Control Disabled. Table 1
provides an explanation of Status LEDs based on its illuminated color and troubleshooting tips to resolve warnings
and Faults when they occur.

Figure 6-1 FAX Front Panel Status LED’s

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-2 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

Also available on the front panel is an RF sample port, this is a convenient way to sample the RF output of the
transmitter. This is a sample of Total RF Out from the Directional Coupler built into the Transmitter Power Block that
internally connects to the 1 5/8" connector. On 15/20/30/40kW Transmitter Systems, this front panel port samples the
RF output of weach power block. To get the RF sample of the transmitter taken from the transmitter system
Directional Coupler, open the front door and locate the SMA connector on the Multi-Unit Interface panel. This is the
sample that comes from the 3 1/8" output connector on top of the transmitter cabinet.

Table 1: Front Panel LED Troubleshooting Table

Symptom Cause and Solution

EXCITER LED is Green Exciter that is on-air is operating with no alarms or faults. Note: In dual exciter systems the
transmitter will not display the fault status of the off -air exciter.

EXCITER LED is Yellow Exciter relay has tripped. Check the off-air exciter RF output. The relay trips on RF power from
exciter being too low.

EXCITER LED is Red On-Air exciter has a fault. Refer to the exciter LED’s and manual for further information.

DRIVE CHAIN LED is Green All IPA’s in all power blocks are operating normally with no faults.

DRIVE CHAIN LED is Yellow IPA Relay has tripped due to low power on either A or B side. Check IPA Module LED’s and fault
log for further information.

DRIVE CHAIN LED is Red IPA is faulted. Check IPA module LED’s in each power block if both A and B sides are green check
RF Switch Board in each power block. IPA faults are VSWR, Over Current,Under
Voltage,Overdrive or OverTemp

POWER AMP LED is Green All PA modules in all power blocks are operating with no faults.

POWER AMP LED is Red One or more PA Modules are faulted or removed from the transmitter. Check fault log for
further details. PA faults are VSWR, OverCurrent,Under Voltage,Overdrive or OverTemp

POWER SUPPLY LED is All Power Supply modules in all power blocks are operating with no faults.
Green

POWER SUPPLY LED is Red One or more Power Supply modules are faulted or removed from the transmitter. AC Mains has
dropped below 190 VAC or has lost a phase (3-Phases systems only). Check fault log and
individual power supply LED’s for further details.

OUTPUT LED is Green Transmitter is ON, above warning threshold, below power limit threshold and reflected power is
ok.

OUTPUT LED is Yellow Transmitter RF power has increased to 110%(Limit) or more of calibrated power, VSWR
Foldback has occurred or transmitter power has dropped below Warning threshold or reject
load is fault. Check exciter and IPA power and reflected power readings. Also check reject load
power and temperature.

OUTPUT LED is Red Transmitter power has dropped below Fault threshold set in System Service menu or VSWR
fault has occurred.

SYSTEM LED is Green Transmitter and Exciter are switched ON and operating normally with no faults or alarms being
reported.

SYSTEM LED is Yellow Transmitter is reporting alarms, these are not severe enough to fault system off. Check the fault
log. System alarms are due to control or cooling faults. APC is off, transmitter has switched to
Low Power Mode(possible reject load fault), fan fault, airflow fault, power limit, VSWR, mute
and backup control.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-3
January 18, 2021

Symptom Cause and Solution

SYSTEM LED is Red Transmitter has a serious fault and Transmitter may be OFF or Software Control has been
disabled either by user or a failed control board. An Interlock open, Cooling fault or RF Mute
has occurred. Check other Status LED’s and fault log for further information.

MUTE LED is Green Transmitter is ON and unmuted. Mute LED will be green when transmitter is OFF.

MUTE LED is Red Transmitter is ON and Muted. Check Equipment Interlock J1-9 of USER REMOTE connector on
rear of power block 1. Check MUTE line J1-7 of USER REMOTE connector on rear of power block
1. Transmitter also will flash MUTE LED red when switching to backup exciter or IPA, it should go
back green once switching is complete. Restrike command will briefly turn MUTE LED red.

6.2.3 System Interface Control Module LED Indicators

Figure 6-2 shows the FAX transmitter System Interface Control Module Status LEDs. Following Figure 6-2 is an
explanation of status LEDs based on its illuminated color and troubleshooting tips to resolve warnings and faults
when they occur.

Note
Each 10kW power Block contains an System Interface Control Module that is located at the right end of
the Power Supply Modules. This card interfaces with all the main subassemblies in the 10kW Power Block
including the front panel LCD Controller. The System Interface Control Module contains Life-Support
(Backup Mode) circuits to enable transmitter operation if the front panel LCD Controller should ever fail.
The Interface Controller contains user buttons to facilitate most transmitter operational functions. In
20kW/30kW/40kW systems, the main Power Block contains an additional identical Interface Control
Module that is referred to as the Multi Unit System Control Module. It is located directly above the Power
Supply Modules in the Main Power Block Cabinet. The Multi Unit System Controller Module interfaces
with each Power Block Cabinet’s Interface Control Module. Both Interface cards are identical. Onboard
Dipswitches determine the configuration (function) of each card.

The following picture shows the front edge of a System Interface Control Module illustrating the front panel LEDs.
There are also 2 columns of surface mount LEDS down the middle. In a FAX15/20/30/40 the LED’s that are available
depends on if the card is acting as a Multi-Unit Interface or System Interface. If acting as System Interface in each
power block, faults that are Transmitter faults will not appear on this card. Only the faults that pertain to that power
block will appear. However, all faults will show up in the fault log.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-4 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

Figure 6-2 Interface Control Module Front LEDs

Refer to the drawing 801-0234-051 sheet 9 of 13.

DS1: +5V: Illuminates Green when the +5 Volt supply for the controller is on. 5 V typically runs 4.6 VDC

DS2: FWD PWR: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the Forward Power Limit (<110% of calibrated power) is
reached

DS3: VSWR FB: VSWR Foldback: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the VSWR threshold (1.3:1 to
1.5:1depending on user setting) is exceeded and the transmitter goes into Power Foldback mode.

DS5: EXT INTLK: External Interlock: OFF when Interlock circuit is complete. Illuminates Red when Interlock circuit is
open User Remote J1-24 to J1-25. Transmitter will fault off and require user to turn transmitter back on.

DS7: FLT OFF: System Fault OFF: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when the transmitter Faults OFF. Check other status
LED’s and the fault log for further information. VSWR Fault greater than 1.5:1 (not Foldback)will cause a System
Fault Off, also an airflow fault will cause the system to fault off.

DS9: VSWR FLT: VSWR Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when the VSWR threshold (1.5:1) is exceeded. This will
also cause a FLT OFF led to light.

DS11: EQUIP: Equipment Interlock: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when the transmitter Equipment Interlock circuit
J1-9 is grounded. Transmitter will mute until the interlock J1-9 of USER REMOTE is open, then transmitter will return
to TPO. DS28 System LED should illuminate as well.

DS13: AC FLT:AC Mains Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when the AC Mains input voltage drops below the
operating range of the power supply. This fault will trip when the AC voltage at the input to the Power Supply
Interface board drops below 190 VAC on any phase. Verify the AC Mains to the transmitter is within the range for

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-5
January 18, 2021

the service being used (single or 3-phase). Check fuses for low voltage detector on each phase on the Power Supply
Interface board in rear of power blocks. Verify cabinet or wall circuit breaker has not tripped.

DS15: LOAD FLT: Reject load Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when a fault in the combiner reject load occurs.
This fault is either a fan has failed, the temperature in the reject load has exceeded fault level, or the reject load
input power is high. If a reject load fault has occurred the transmitter will automatically switch to Low Power Mode,
approximately quarter power. Power Reference voltage will drop to 2.7 VDC.

DS17: RF MUTE: Normally OFF, lights when the RF is muted by a TX OFF command.

DS19: Exciter Not Ready; Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the Exciter is muted. Check Exciter manual for
further information.

DS20: DRV CHN: Drive Chain: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the IPA is muted. This will occur when
switching to the backup IPA.

DS21: REMOTE: Remote Mute: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow whenever a RF mute occurs. Check J1-7 of USER
REMOTE for ground which allows operation defeatable by S2-5 ON. See tables 2-3, 5-2, etc.

DS4: FM: Illuminates Green when the transmitter is in FM Mode.

DS6: FM+HD: Illuminates Green when the transmitter is in FM + HD Mode.

DS8: HD: Illuminates Green when the transmitter is in HD Mode.

DS10: MUX: Flashes with MUX activity. This should flash all the time.

DS12: APC OFF: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the APC is turned OFF. APC will be disabled when there are
faults in the system such as failed PA module or PS module. Check other LED’s and the fault log for further
information. This can also be turned off manually in the LCD Menu tree.

DS14: EXC B: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the backup Exciter is switched into the Drive Chain.

DS16: LOW PWR: Normally OFF. Illuminates Yellow when the transmitter is switched to the Low Power/UPS mode
via J1-8 or USER REMOTE. This will also occur when the Reject Load has a fault (Fan, RF or Temp).

DS18: RESTRIKE: Normally OFF. Momentarily illuminates Yellow when the transmitter experiences an ON command
pulse. This could be from an AC power failure, a High VSWR, etc. If the transmitter does not come ON and stay ON,
another Restrike occurs. If the transmitter does not stay ON after the 3rd Restrike, it stays OFF.

DS34: IPA CTRL: APC to IPA: Illuminates when the transmitter is setup for APC to drive the IPA

DS31: EXC: Exciter: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when an on-air Exciter fault occurs. Check Exciter manual for
further information.

DS30: DRV: Drive Chain Summary Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when an IPA fault occurs. Check fault Log for
further information.

DS32: PA: Power Amplifier Summary Fault: Illuminates Red when any type of PA fault occurs. Check fault Log for
further information.

DS29: PS: Power Supply Summary Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when any type of PS fault occurs. Check fault
Log for further information.

DS33: OUT: Output Summary Fault: Normally OFF: Illuminates Red when any type of RF output fault occurs. Check
fault Log for further information.

DS28: SYS:System Summary Fault: Normally OFF. Illuminates Red when any fault in the transmitter system occurs.
Check fault Log for further information.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-6 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

6.3 Power Supply Faults

Figure 6-3 shows the power supply fault chart. Refer to the LED’s on the FAX power supply and cross reference to
find out specifically the power supply condition or fault. The power supply has three fault outputs that are tied
together on the Power Supply Interface board as one generic PS Fault.

Figure 6-3 FAX Power Supply Fault Matrix

6.4 Telnet Session

Telnet is another way of helping diagnose a problem with the transmitter. Customers should only use telnet to
view readings and not use telnet to control the transmitter unless asked to do so by a GatesAir Service Engineer.
To open a telnet session the Windows command prompt can be used. If using Windows 7, a terminal emulator
program must be used.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-7
January 18, 2021

Figure 6-4 Telnet Login Screen

To open a session ensure the computer is either connected directly to the transmitter Ethernet port or connected to
the same network as the transmitter. If connecting direct to the front panel Ethernet, ensure the computer network
properties is set to DHCP. Once the computer is connected go to the command prompt and type telnet plus the IP
address, ie "telnet 192.168.117.88". The screen should appear as in Figure 6-4 asking for a password.

Prior to August 2013 shipments, the telnet password is "admin".

November 2014 and later shipments password is "gates" and will always be the same password as the Engineer 1
password on the GUI if ever changed.

Note: The number of telnet pages will vary depending or the revision of code installed in your transmitter.

Figure 6-5 Telnet Page 1/7

Page 1 of the telnet shows basic information about your transmitter including serial number, MAC and IP addresses,
software and hardware revs. Any item shown in parenthesis () are commands, pressing the corresponding number
in that page to set.

1. Temp - Rear temperature of the transmitter that is measured on the Power Supply Interface Board. This
temperature is the hot air exhausted from the PA modules and power supplies.

2. +5.0 VDC - 5 volt line form the aux output of the the main power supplies. This is bussed together on the
Power Supply Interface board and distributed throughout the control system.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-8 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

3. +3.3 VDC - Regulated 3.3 VDC on the Control/Display Board to run the Micro Module. Schematic sheet 7.

4. +1.8 VDC - Regulated 1.8 VDC on the Control/Display Board for the Ethernet Ports. Schematic sheet.

These items require a password which is "harris_fax"

(1) MAC Address of the front panel Ethernet port. Cannot be changed.

(2) Mode of front panel Ethernet port. Static or DHCP user setting.

(3) IP Address of front panel Ethernet port. Default shown, user setting only in telnet.

(4) MAC Address of the rear panel Ethernet port. Cannot be changed.

(5) Mode of rear panel Ethernet port. Static or DHCP user setting.

(6) IP Address of rear panel Ethernet port. User setting.

(7) Netmask of rear panel Ethernet Port. User setting.

(8) Gateway of rear Ethernet port. User setting.

(S) Save Settings. Required before changes take place.

(r) Restore Setup - Restores last saved setup.

(h) Set TX S.N. - Not used

(u) Set User - Should be done via remote GUI

(t) Set Date /Time - sets transmitter date and time

(f) Store Factory - stores the setup in the transmitter and can be recalled using (r) above.

(z) Debug Mode - should not be used unless instructed by GatesAir Service Engineer. OFF should be normal
mode.

(h) Set TX S.N. - Sets transmitter Serial Number. Factory use only.

(l) Restore Login - restores all Login/passwords to factory default. This requires password of "harrismfg", this
password is set in code and cannot be changed.

(b) Bit Mode - should not be used unless instructed by GatesAir Service Engineer. OFF should be normal mode.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-9
January 18, 2021

Figure 6-6 Telnet Page 2/7 System Control/Status

Display shows status of each item that is part of the Transmitter System. Under "Control/Status" 1 - 13 and A - M will
correspond to the Multi-Unit Interface Board LED’s defined in Section 6.3.3 of this manual. Under "System Analog"
values are shown as displayed on LCD as well as their corresponding DAC/ADC values.

(1) TX ON/OFF - Turns transmitter ON or OFF

(2) RF Mute Ctrl - Mutes or unmutes the transmitter

(3) Pwr Raise - Raises RF power of transmitter

(4) Pwr Lower - Lower RF power of transmitter

(5) IPA SW Mode - changes the IPA switching mode between Auto and Manual

(6) EXC SW Mode - Changes the exciter switching mode between Auto and Manual

(7) IPA Switch - Switches the IPA between A and B side

(8) EXC Switch - Switches exciter between A and B

(a) FB THD - Adjusts VSWR foldback threshold. DO NOT USE unless instructed by GatesAir Service Engineer

(b) PS Ref - Power supply reference DAC value. DO NOT USE Can cause power supply to exceed acceptable
voltage levels

(t) Test - Not used

(c) UPS Ref - Reference power setting of Low Power/UPS Mode. This is mode that is set by grounding J1-8 of
the USER REMOTE. Telnet is only place where this can be changed. Default is 2700 which is approximately
1/4 power

To set the UPS Low Power Mode:

• Provide a continuous Ground on J1-8.


• Press the letter c on the computer connected to the FAX.
• Adjust the value until the proper power has been set.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-10 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

Figure 6-7 Telnet Page 3/7 Power Block Control/Status

Display shows status of each item that is part of each Power Block. In a FAX30/40 pressing (2) will display status and
values for power blocks 3 and 4, pressing (1) will switch display back to power blocks 1 and 2. The Status 1 - 6 in the
top sections of the screen will correspond to the LED’s on the System Interface Board in each power block.

Figure 6-8 Telnet Page 4/7 PA Modules Status/Meters

Displays IPA and PA Module Fault status, Current, PA Volts and PA Temp. In a FAX30/40 pressing (2) will display status
and values for power blocks 3 and 4, pressing (1) will switch display back to power blocks 1 and 2.

Fault status bits are displayed as shown:


b0/b1/b2/b3/b4/b5
b0 = PA Overdrive - greater than 25 Watts into module
b1 = VSWR Fault - greater than 100 W reflected into module. Depends on frequency, load and phase angle.
b2 = Under Voltage Fault -
b3 = Overcurrent Fault - Greater than 30 Amps current draw on pallet
b4 = Overtemp Fault - faults at 95 C
b5 = Module not Present Fault

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 6-11
January 18, 2021

Figure 6-9 Telnet Page 5/7 Fault Log


Page 5 displays the contents of the fault log. Each fault will show time and date of occurrence and time and date
fault was cleared. (R) Clears the fault log, Up/Down arrows pages through multiple pages.

Figure 6-10 Telnet Page 6/7 Calibration Data


Page 6 displays stored calibration data for the transmitter. There are no commands available on the page.

Figure 6-11 Telnet Page 7/7 Debug Information


Page 7 displays debug information for the transmitter. There are no commands available on the page.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
6-12 Section-6 Diagnostics
January 18, 2021

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 7-1
January 18, 2021

7 Section-7 Parts List

7.1 Exploded View 10 kW Power Block


Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 are the Exploded view of the 10 kW power block. Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 are the
Exploded view of the 7.5kW and 10 kW XP power block. The parts given are not an exhaustive parts list but are the
field replaceable parts for each assembly and sub-assembly in the unit. If the need comes up that requires a part not
listed, the numbers for that assembly can be given to a GatesAir Representative who can assist in finding the correct
part.

Table 7-1 FAX High Level Part Numbers

Part Number Description

995-0091-001G FAX10K Configurable

981-0136-002 FAX 10 Basic Transmitter, Primary Power Block

981-0136-003 FAX10 Basic Power Block, Secondary 10K for FAX15/20/30/40

995-0091-002G FAX20 Configurable

995-0091-003G FAX30 Configurable

995-0091-004G FAX40 Configurable

995-0091-008G FAX 7.5kW Configurable

995-0091-009G FAX 15 Configurable

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
7-2 Section-7 Parts List
January 18, 2021

$66(0%/<6<67(0,1)(5)$&(
*6<6,17(5)$&( 3:$ $66(0%/<)250$7;075)$;.)0
6<6,17(5)$&(%5$&.(7 6+((70(7$/ *
$66(0%/<%$6,&35,0$5<.:)$;
32:(56833/<02'8/(63636 
  3686:9'&:9$& $66(0%/<&20021&20321(176.:)$;


5)6:,7&+02'8/($ $66(0%/<.$&',673'(/7$
*3:$5)6:,7&+$ $66(0%/<.$&',673:<(
5)6:,7&+%5$&.(7 6+((70(7$/ $66(0%/<.$&',673
5)6:,7&+&29(5 32/<&$5%21$7(
81/(66127('$//48$17,7,(6$5(  ($&+






B(
;3
/2
'(
'
9,(
:B
)5
21
7

/2&$7,212)'8$/
,3$02'8/(27+(5
 6/276$5(
3$02'8/(6
32:(5$03/,),(5602'8/(6,3$ 3$3$
  $66(0%/<3$02'8/( )5217'225$66(0%/<$
*3:$)002'8/( 3$1(/)5217'225 6+((70(7$/
*3:$02'8/(&21752//(5 6+,(/')5217'225 6+((70(7$/
),/07+(50$/,17(5)$&( &29(5),/7(5 6+((70(7$/
),/7(5
*773:$&21752/ ',63/$<,,7(67('$
-803(56)$;.: $66<0&)8&02'8/()$;7(67('
&$%/('& )$;3$1(/*$6.(7
&$%/($& %$77(5<9/,7+,80&2,1&5
&$%/(5)6:,7&+
&$%/(6<67(0,17(5)$&(32:(5
6,1*/((;&,7(5.,7&$%/(6 $//02'(/6

Figure 7-1 10 kW Power Block Front View

Note
For air filter; models manufactured prior to the fall of 2016 use p/n 943-5610-080. These doors are iden-
tified by having two screws to secure the door closed.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 7-3
January 18, 2021

ASSEMBLY, I/O REAR ACCESS 971 0054 010 A9 AC MAINS INPUT TERMINALS BEHIND AC ACCESS PLATE 943 5614 082
943 5614 112 - PLATE, REAR I/O ACCESS
952 9266 007 - CABLE I/O (CURRENT VERSIONS) (EARLY VERSIONS)
614 0977 000 - (6) INSULATOR 354 0852 000 - (5) LUG 6-14AWG
PLATE, COMBINER ACCESS 943 5614 087 943 5614 350 - TAP WYE 3Ø 410 0152 000 - (4) CERAMIC INSULATOR
943 5614 362 - (2) TAP 1Ø 410 0156 000 - (4) CERAMIC INSULATOR
943 5614 441 - (3) TAP 3Ø DELTA 344 0253 000 - (4) STUD M5x63.5 2-1/2"
ASSEMBLY, PWA, PS INTER 901 0234 061G A5
FUSES ON BOARD-
398 0488 000 - (4) 1A 250V (F1 F2 F3 F6)
398 0642 000 - (2) 5A 32VDC (F4 F5)
398 0762 001 - (2) 15A 250V (F9 F10) 971 0054 015 ASSEMBLY 16RU REAR DOOR A6 (CURRENT VERSION)
CURRENT VERSIONS DO NOT USE THE CENTER FAN
430 0358 000 - (4) FAN, 48VDC 410CFM 172MM B1-B4
430 0292 000 - (4) FAN GUARD, 6.14" DIA
448 1128 000 - LATCH COMRESSION
901 0234 151G - PWA FAN CONTROL BD A1
943 5614 268 - CLOSEOUT REAR DOOR FAN (SHEET METAL)

971 0054 006 ASSEMBLY 16RU REAR DOOR A6 (EARLY VERSIONS)


430 0356 000 - (5) FAN, 48VDC 350CFM 172MM
430 0292 000 - (5) FAN GUARD, 6.14" DIA
448 1128 000 - LATCH COMRESSION
901 0203 441 - PWA 5X FAN MONITOR A1

ASSEMBLY, BACKPLANE 971 0054 020 (4) A1-A4


901 0234 031G - (4) PWA BACKPLANE
943 5614 235 - (4) SPACER, BACKPLANE, FAX (SHEET METAL)
943 5614 239 - (4) COVER, BACKPLANE, FAX (SHEET METAL)
943 5614 240 -(16) SPACER, N CONNECTOR (SHEET METAL)
14-WAY COMBINER LOAD 971 0054 003 A15
801 0234 093G - (2) PWB, ISO INPUT A1, A2
14-WAY PA COMBINER 971 0054 002 A14 -LOW PASS FILTER 14-WAY SPLITTER 971 0054 004 A12 801 0234 103G - PWB ISO GROUND A3
971 0054 007 - ASSEMBLY DIRECTION COUPLER A2 901 0234 011G - PWA, 2-WAY SPLITTER A1 943 5614 060 - SHEILD, REJECT LOAD (SHEET METAL)
801 0234 083G - PWB, 14-WAY COMBINER A1 901 0234 021G - (2) PWA, 7-WAY SPLITTER A2 A3 943 5614 061 - CHASSIS, REJECT LOAD (SHEET METAL)
801 0234 113G - (2) PWB, COMBINER JUNCTION A2 A3 943 5614 096 - BRACKET, SPLITTER TOP (SHEET METAL) 943 5614 063 - HEATSNIK, REJECT LOAD
943 5614 064 - HOUSING, COMBINER (SHEET METAL) 943 5614 097 - BRACKET, SPLITTER BOT (SHEET METAL) 952 9266 009 - COMBINER LOAD CABLES
943 5614 065 - OUTER HOUSING, COMBINER (SHEET METAL) 943 5614 496 - HEATSNIK, SPLITTER LOAD 544 1681 000 - (28) REJECT LOAD RES 25 OHM 800W
943 5614 138 - COVER, COMBINER (SHEET METAL) 952 9266 008 - JUMPERS, SPLITTER 055 0100 005 - THERMAL COMPOND 802
952 9266 011 - 14-WAY COMBINER, CABLES 544 1654 000 - REJECT LOAD RES 100 OHM 250W
544 1661 000 - (14) REJECT LOAD RES 100 OHM 10W
055 0100 005 - THERMAL COMPOND 802

Figure 7-2 10 kW Power Block Rear View

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
888-2720-001
       ':*12 
$66(0%/<6<67(0,1)(5)$&(
*6<6,17(5)$&( 3:$
6<6,17(5)$&(%5$&.(7 6+((70(7$/ $66(0%/<)250$7;075)$;.)0
*
32:(56833/<02'8/(63636 $66(0%/<)250$7;075)$;.)0

Figure 7-3 FAX 7.5 kW and 10kW XP Power Block Front View
  3686:9'&: *

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


$66(0%/<%$6,&35,0$5<.:)$;)021/<

5)6:,7&+02'8/($
' *3:$5)6:,7&+$ $66(0%/<&20021&20321(176.:)$;)021/< '
5)6:,7&+%5$&.(7 6+((70(7$/ 
5)6:,7&+&29(5 32/<&$5%21$7(
$66(0%/<.$&',673'(/7$
$66(0%/<.$&',673:<(
$66(0%/<.$&',673
81/(66127('$//48$17,7,(6$5(  ($&+
& &


 

%
% $6
,&
35
%
,0
$5
<
.:
)0
2
1/
< 5+3$&/262873$1(/
)5217'225$66(0%/<$
3$1(/)5217'225 6+((70(7$/
6+,(/')5217'225 6+((70(7$/
&29(5),/7(5 6+((70(7$/
),/7(5
/+3$&/262873$1(/ 32:(5$03/,),(5602'8/(63$3$ *773:$&21752/ ',63/$<,,7(67('$
  $66(0%/<3$02'8/(2.:;3 $66<0&)8&02'8/()$;7(67('?
*3:$3$3$//(7)0.:.:;3 )$;3$1(/*$6.(7
$66(0%/<3$02'8/(. %$77(5<9/,7+,80&2,1&5
*3:$3$3$//(7.
 6/276$5( *3:$02'8/(&21752//(5
3$02'8/(6 ),/07+(50$/,17(5)$&(
-803(56)$;.:
&$%/('&
&$%/($&
&$%/(5)6:,7&+
&$%/(6<67(0,17(5)$&(32:(5 72/(5$1&(681/(66127(' $//',0(16,216,1,1&+(6
6,1*/((;&,7(5.,7&$%/(6 $//02'(/6 81/(6627+(5:,6(127('
;“;;“;;;“
+2/(6“$1*/(6“ƒ
$ 52+6&203/,$173(5',5(&7,9((& ':*6&$/(  $//¥,1',&$7(60,&52,1&+
0867&203/<:,7+:25.0$16+,3
67$1'$5'663(&
$
'5$:1 7,7/(
1 5()(572$*,/()25&203/(7(%20 5 /75 =21( '$7( ')70 (1* (&21%5 %< 160,7+
2 $//',0(16,21672%(“81/(6627+(5:,6(127(' 6((127( (
7 +2/(&+$57',0(16,21672%(“81/(6627+(5:,6(127(' 9 $ 1(:':* 7+,6'2&80(17&217$,1635235,(7$5<'$7$2) '$7(
 %$6,&35,0$5<..:
(
6
,
6
*DWHV$LU,QF 0(&+
&+. 160,7+ )$;;3
352- *$7(6$,531
, 12',6&/2685(5(352'8&7,212586(2)$1< (1* ')227(
2 %  .$* ') 3 

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir


3$577+(5(2)0$<%(0$'((;&(37%<:5,77(13(50,66,21 0)*
1 (1*  ':*12 5(9
$''('.3$3$57180%(5672':*  %
Section-7 Parts List

' 6+((7
2)
January 18, 2021

       
7-4
888-2720-001
       ':*12 

3/$7(&20%,1(5$&&(66
$66(0%/<,25($5$&&(66$
3/$7(5($5,2$&&(66
$66(0%/<3:$36,17(5$ &$%/(,2
)86(621%2$5'
  $9 )))
  $9'& ))
  $9 )
' '
$&0$,16,13877(50,1$/6%(+,1'$&$&&(663/$7(
&855(179(5,216 ($5/<9(56,216
  ,168/$725  /8*$:)
7$3:<(   &(5$0,&,168/$725
  7$3   &(5$0,&,168/$725
  7$3 '(/7$  678'0;

$66(0%/<585($5'225$ &855(179(56,21
&855(179(56,216'212786(7+(&(17(5)$1
  )$19'&&)000%%
  )$1*8$5'',$
/$7&+&205(66,21
*3:=)$1&21752/%'$
&/26(2875($5'225)$1 6+((70(7$/

& &

% %
$66(0%/<%$&.3/$1(  $$
*  3:$%$&.3/$1(
  63$&(5%$&.3/$1()$; 6+((70(7$/
  &29(5%$&.3/$1()$; 6+((70(7$/
  63$&(51&211(&725 6+((70(7$/

:$<&20%,1(5/2$'$
*  3:%,62,1387$$
:$<63/,77(5$ *3:%,62*5281'$
:$<3$&20%,1(5$/2:3$66),/7(5 6+(,/'5(-(&7/2$' 6+((70(7$/
$66(0%/<',5(&7,21&283/(5$ 3:$:$<63/,77(5$
  3:$:$<63/,77(5$$ &+$66,65(-(&7/2$' 6+((70(7$/
3:%:$<&20%,1(5$ +($76,1.5(-(&7/2$'
*  3:%&20%,1(5-81&7,21$$ %5$&.(763/,77(5723 6+((70(7$/
%5$&.(763/,77(5%27720 6+((70(7$/ &20%,1(5/2$'&$%/(6
+286,1*&20%,1(5 6+((70(7$/   5(-(&7/2$'5(62+0:
287(5+286,1*&20%,1(5 6+((70(7$/ +($76,1.63/,77(5/2$'
-803(563/,77(5 7+(50$/&20321'
&29(5&20%,1(5 6+((70(7$/
:$<&20%,1(5&$%/(6 5(-(&7/2$'5(62+0:
  5(-(&7/2$'5(62+0:
7+(50$/&20321'

WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure 7-4 FAX 7.5kW and 10kW XP Power Block Rear View
72/(5$1&(681/(66127(' $//',0(16,216,1,1&+(6
;“;;“;;;“ 81/(6627+(5:,6(127('
+2/(6“$1*/(6“ƒ 0867&203/<:,7+:25.0$16+,3
$ 52+6&203/,$173(5',5(&7,9((& ':*6&$/(  $//¥,1',&$7(60,&52,1&+ 67$1'$5'663(&
$
'5$:1 7,7/(
1 5()(572$*,/()25&203/(7(%20 5 /75 =21( '$7( ')70 (1* (&21%5 %< 160,7+
2 $//',0(16,21672%(“81/(6627+(5:,6(127(' 6((127( ( '$7(
7 +2/(&+$57',0(16,21672%(“81/(6627+(5:,6(127(' 9 $ 1(:':* 7+,6'2&80(17&217$,1635235,(7$5<'$7$2)  %$6,&35,0$5<.:
( , 0(&+
*DWHV$LU,QF &+. 160,7+ )$;;3
6 6 6((6+((7
352- *$7(6$,531
, 12',6&/2685(5(352'8&7,212586(2)$1< (1* ')227(
2 %  .$* ') 3 0)*

3$577+(5(2)0$<%(0$'((;&(37%<:5,77(13(50,66,21
1 (1*  ':*12 5(9
5(9,6('6+7 6+((7 
' 2) %
       
January 18, 2021
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir


7-5
7-6 Section-7 Parts List
January 18, 2021

7.2 AC Distribution Panel Parts (All Models)


The following tables contain the parts that are not common on all FAX models. A FAX15/20/30/40 are built from
multiple 10 kW Power Blocks and all the components that make those blocks are common.

Circuit Breakers for AC Distribution Panels

1-Phase (Exciter/Auxiliary Section):


606-1136-160 2-Pole,16 Amp, 480 VAC 1 Per Panel (Common to all Panels)
606-1136-200 2-Pole 20 Amp 480 VAC (FAX 15)

3-Phase Delta Circuit Breakers (1 Per Power Block):


606-1180-000 3-Pole, 63 Amp, 480 VAC

3-Phase Wye Circuit Breakers (1 Per Power Block):


606-1199-400 4-Pole, 40 Amp, 400 VAC 1 Per Power Block

1-Phase Circuit Breakers(FAX5/10/20 Only) (1 Per Power Block):


606-1189-500 2-Pole, 50 Amp, 400 VAC 1 Per Power Block

Outlet Strips (Common to all Panels):


253-0253-000 230 VAC, 10 Amp, 4xC13
253-0254-000 120 VAC, 15 Amp, 4x5-15R

AC Configuration Straps (All Models):


943-5614-441 3-Phase Delta Straps (3 required per power block)
943-5614-362 3-Phase Wye/Single Phase Straps (2 required per power block)

7.3 FAX15/20/30/40 Specific Parts


The cabinet interface board is part of the Multi-Unit Control panel located in the primary power block.

Cabinet Interface Board - 901-0234-271G (Part of the Multi-Unit Control Panel in primary power block)

The directional coupler is the same unit for all the FAX15/20/30/40 transmitters. This coupler provides the samples
for the system power detection, RTAC samples and the modulation monitor sample.

971-0023-198 3-1/8" EIA Un-Flanged 3-port 54 dB coupling factor

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW 7-7
January 18, 2021

7.3.1 Reject Load Parts


There are two sizes of reject load used in he FAX series transmitters, 6 kW and 12 kW. The external fan control
board, fans and internal resistors are all common. Quantities are load size dependant.

Table 7-2 Reject Load Common Replaceable Parts

Part Number Description Qty

943-5614-265 Fan, 48 VDC, 410 CFM, PWM Control, 172 mm 2 or 4

546-0338-000 Resistor, 500 ohm, 10%, 300 Watt, Non-Inductive 10 or 20

901-0234-151G Fan Control Board 1 per Load

7.3.2 Splitters/Combiners

Table 7-3 FAX15 System Drive Splitter

Part Number Description

971-0054-058 Assy, Splitter FAX 15 kW

Table 7-4 FAX15/20/30/40 Combiners

Part Number Description

971-0054-012 2-way Power Combiner 15/20 kW output, 3 dB Hybrid

971-0054-019 2-way Power Combiner 30 kW output, 4.77 dB Hybrid

971-0054-047 2-way Power Combiner 40 kW output, 3 dB Hybrid

Table 7-5 FAX15/20/30/40 Splitters (Multi-Unit Controller Only)

Part Number Description

9010234281G 2-way FAX 15/20 Cabinet Power Splitter

9010234311G 3-way FAX30 Cabinet Power Splitter

9010234321G 4-way FAX40 Cabinet Power Splitter

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
7-8 Section-7 Parts List
January 18, 2021

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-1
January 18, 2021

A Appendix-A Cabinet Unification

A.1 Scope and Purpose


If FAX transmitter cabinets are required to be bolted together, the following instructions are to be followed. Refer to
wiring diagrams in Section 100 of the drawing package that accompanied the transmitter if needed.

A.2 Procedure
Set racks side by side with the driver transmitter (cabinet 1) on the left.
• Must have a space of 1-3/4" between racks in both the front and back sides.

Figure A-1 Cabinet placement

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-2 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

• Loosen the pre-installed hardware between cabinet 1 & 2


• Assemble filler channels to the front and rear of cabinets (3 per side).
• From the top maneuver each channel onto hardware.
• Tighten hardware until secure.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-3
January 18, 2021

• Install the covers over the filler channels between the two cabinets in the front and rear.
• Remove preinstalled hardware from top of racks.
• Install top bracket and secure with hardware that was just removed.
• Fasten the top ends of the channel covers to top bracket with finish screws.
(2) Channel Cover.....943-5614-507
(1) Top Bracket .........943-5614-509
(4) Screw ..................303-4112-025
(4) Flat ......................310-0026-000
(4) Split .....................314-0015-000
(2) Finish Screw

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-4 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

• Bend back grounding strap in cabinet 2 and fasten to the grounding bar cabinet 1.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-5
January 18, 2021

• Position the final horizontal combiner as shown and maneuver into cabinets.

• Connect the final horizontal combiner to both vertical combiners.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-6 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

• Secure combiner with hose clamps at each inlet.

• Install RF conductor assembly that shipped loose with unit.


• Insert RF conductor assembly thru cabinet 2 and maneuver around combiner and connect to reject load in
front of cabinet 1.

• Connect the RF conductor previously installed to the top of the horizontal combiner.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-7
January 18, 2021

• Secure hose clamp at connection.

• Install directional coupler onto the horizontal combiner.


• Install RF output line going from the coupler to the top of rack.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-8 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

Fasten the RF connector/bullet to top of rack and connect to the RF output line coming from coupler.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-9
January 18, 2021

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-10 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-11
January 18, 2021

• Locate bag with coax cables & pink wires in rear of cabinet 2.
• Remove cables from bag.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-12 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

• Route coax cables up to the directional coupler.


Connect cable #103 to J1
Connect cable #104 to J2
Connect cable #105 to J3

Connect Wago connectors with pink wires #217 & #218 together in cabinet 2 as shown.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-13
January 18, 2021

• Locate the bag with a ribbon cable in the front of cabinet 1.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-14 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

• Remove cables from bag and route over to cabinet 2.

Connect Wago connectors with pink wires #210 thru #216 together in cabinet 2. Clamp Cables as shown.

Connect W208,W209(FAX40 Only) and W201 as shown above. Ensure coaxes are tight but do not over-tighten.

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
FAX 5/7.5/15/10/20/30/40KW A-15
January 18, 2021

• Install blank panel onto front of cabinet 2.


• Assemble rear doors on both cabinets.

End of cabinet unification instructions.

888-2720-001 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. Copyright ©2020, GatesAir
A-16 Appendix-A Cabinet Unification
January 18, 2021

Copyright ©2020, GatesAir WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing. 888-2720-001
Support Contacts: http://www.gatesair.com/services.aspx
Customer Portal: http://support.gatesair.com
GatesAir has office locations around the world. For locations and contact information see:
http://www.gatesair.com/company/contact-us.aspx

GatesAir.com

You might also like